Home

Samsung Xpress SL-K4250RX multifunctional

1. 9 Troubleshooting 218 Clearing paper jams 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out Paper jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex Return Jam Duplex 1 K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 3 Close the right door 9 Troubleshooting 219 Clearing paper jams 2 Paper jam at the inside of duplex path Jam Duplex 2 KU Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 3 Close the right door 9 Troubleshooting 220 Clearing paper jams 2 Paper jam bottom of duplex path Jam Duplex Regi KU Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 3 Close the right door 9 Troubleshooting 221 Clearing paper jams 2 Open and close the front door Printing automatically resumes Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face down LS If the optional Inner Finisher or booklet finisher is installed remove the jammed paper as shown below KU Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Gently pull the paper
2. NORWAY 815 56480 www samsung com no support OMAN 800 SAMSUNG 800 726 7864 www samsung com ae support English www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic PAKISTAN 0800 Samsung 72678 www samsung com pk support MOLDOVA 0 800 614 40 www samsung com support MONGOLIA 7 495 363 17 00 www samsung com support MONTENEGRO 020 405 888 www samsung com support MOROCCO 080 100 2255 NANA samsung conn n_africa support MOZAMBIQUE 847267864 827267864 www samsung com support MYANMAR 01 2399888 www samsung com support NAMIBIA 08 197 267 864 www samsung com support NIGERIA 0800 726 7864 wow samsung can africa_en support NETHERLANDS OOS ANGUNE 0900 7267864 www samsung com NEW ZEALAND 0800 726 786 www samsung com nz support PANAMA 800 7267 800 0101 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English Contact SAMSUNG worldwide go Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 009 800 542 0001 WebSite www samsung com latin support Country Region Customer Care Center 1 800 682 3180 WebSite www samsung com latin support Spanish Spanish PARAGUAY PUERTO RICO www samsung com www samsung com latin_en support latin_en support English English PERU 0 800 777 08 www samsung com 800 CALL 800 2255 www samsung com pe support ae su
3. e Eco Features Configuration Setting the ECO fratures Default Settings The machine is set to Default Eco mode Custom Settings Change any necessary values 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 302 Admin Settings This option is only available to administrators 2 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Tap Settings gt Admin Settings from the home screen or Apps Feature Security Description Allows you to set up the security related settings see Security on page 304 Feature Print Settings Description You can set print related settings When there is no specific input for printing options the machine prints with the settings you set here Set the frequently used printing settings This feature can be useful if your company has a specific printing form see Print Settings on page 309 Box Settings Allows you to check the current box settings and change the settings if necessary see Box Settings on page 309 General Settings Allows you to set up the general settings Measurement Supplies Management Contention Management and other settings see General Settings on page 306 Report Settings The paper source setting specifies the default paper tray that the m
4. Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window The selected overlay prints on your document KA The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as that of the document you will print with the overlay Deleting a page overlay You can delete page overlays that you no longer use 1 2 Ul In the Printing Preferences window click the Advanced tab Select Print Overlay from the Overlay drop down list Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay List box If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay List select Load from the Overlay List Select the overlay file you want to delete Click Delete When a confirming message window appears click Yes Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing 83 Using Direct Printing Utility This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files without A HDD should be installed on your machine to print PDF files using this There are several ways you can print using the Direct Printing Utility program e You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print Deactivate the printing restriction feature and retry printing From the Direct Printing Utility window e You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password Deactivate the password feature and retry printing 1 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs e Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the Direc
5. You can see the contact information from Settings gt Contact Information gt System Administrator or Samsung Support This information is configured by the machine s administrator J Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life 2 Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it does not mean the machine is damaged Contact a service representative when print quality Toner low related message appears on the display problems occur e White streaks or light printing occurs The status LED blinks red If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the 2 Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner 2 Click this link to open an animation about redistributing toner Open the front door 1 X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Thoroughly shake the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 9 Troubleshooting 192 Redistributing toner 5 Close the front door Ensure that the door is securely closed 4 If toner gets on your
6. install d command to uninstall the whole package 8 Select Copies to set the number of copies e To verify removal results execute the install c command 9 Check the Collate option to receive copies already sorted To re install it use the command install i to reinstall the binaries 1 0 Check the Reverse Order option to receive copies in the reverse order 3 Network setup 333 Installing driver over the network 11 Check the Make Default option to set this printer as default 12 Click OK to add the printer 3 Network setup 334 Samsung Mobile Print What is Samsung Mobile Print Supported Mobile OS Samsung Mobile Print is a free application that enables users to print photos e Android OS 2 3 or higher documents and web pages directly from your smartphone or tablet Samsung iOS 4 0 or higher Mobile Print is not only compatible with your Android and iOS smart phones but also with your iPod Touch and tablet PC It connects your mobile device to a network connected Samsung printer or to a wireless printer through a Wi Fi access point Installing a new driver or configuring network settings isn t necessary just simply install the Samsung Mobile Print application and it will automatically detect compatible Samsung printers Besides printing photos web pages and PDFs scanning is also supported If you have a Samsung multifunction scan any document into a JPG PDF or PNG format for quick an
7. Configuration Print to see the machine configuration information This feature allows you to check the remaining percentage of each supply Product information version information product setting and paper setting are included Tap Settings gt Management from the home screen or Apps ex toner cartridge imaging unit Supplies Information Print to check remaining percentage of each supply Usage Counter Print to check the count of the jobs performed Print usage scan usage and fax usage information are included Demo Page Print demo page to check if the machine is working properly Also you can select A4 or Letter size Error Information Print to check what errors have occurred in the machine Error types and counts are included Network Configuration Print to see the network configuration information Network configuration information such as TCP IP Raw TCP IP and LPD information are printed 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 311 Management Account Print to see the account list Send Send Confirmation You can set the machine to print a report whether a send was successfully completed or not Fax Received Print to check the list of faxes received Faxsent Print to check the list of faxes sent Fax scheduled jobs Print to check the list of scheduled fax jobs Email sent Print to check the transmission state of the Scan to Email job Font PCL Font List Print to see
8. LUOKAN 3B NAKYMATTOMALLE LASER SATEILYA ALTISTUMISTA SATEELLE CLASS 3B AHF AAA TI ILAHA BRA 28 Se 3B B 7H HOA BAO SSEUC HINOG FAEK Aa CRS A aac fili SIR EERE BUHI ARE ee EAT aT EHER T ENE ORR TR 11 Appendix Regulatory information This product s ozone emission rate is under 0 1 ppm Because ozone is heavier than air keep the product in a place with good Power saver This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use ventilation When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of INGANNA ban di time power consumption is automatically lowered ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U S marks Mercury Safety For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http www energystar gov For ENERGY STAR certified models the ENRGY STAR label will be on Contains Mercury Dispose According to Local State or Federal your machine Check if your machine is ENERGY STAR certified Hg Laws U S A only Recycling Recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR Manganese Dioxide amp amp environmentally responsible manner Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California USA Perchlorate warning Perchlorate Material special handling may apply
9. UKRAINE 0 800 502 000 www samsung com ua support Ukrainian www samsung com ua_ru support Russian URUGUAY 000 405 437 33 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English 0211 350370 www samsung com support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide go Glossary The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well as mentioned in this user s guide 802 11 802 11 is a set of standards for wireless local area network WLAN communication developed by the IEEE LAN MAN Standards Committee IEEE 802 802 11b g n 802 11b g n can share same hardware and use the 2 4 GHz band 802 11b supports bandwidth up to 11 Mbps 802 11n supports bandwidth up to 150 Mbps 802 11b g n devices may occasionally suffer interference from microwave ovens cordless telephones and Bluetooth devices Access point Access Point or Wireless Access Point AP or WAP is a device that connects wireless communication devices together on wireless local area networks WLAN and acts as a central transmitter and receiver of WLAN radio signals ADF An Automatic Document Feeder ADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan some amount of the paper at once AppleTalk AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed
10. FDI Kit 0 O 0 0 O 0 Job Separator 0 O 0 O 0 O a Depending on your country wireless LAN card may not be available For some countries only 802 11 b g can be applied Contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you bought your machine e Included o Optional Blank Not available Useful to know The machine does not print Open the print queue list and remove the document from the list ee Canceling a print job on page 67 Remove the driver and install it again see Installing the driver locally on page 38 Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows see Setting your machine as a default machine on page 87 Where can I purchase accessories or supplies Inquire at a Samsung distributor or your retailer Visit www samsung com supplies Select your country region to view product service information The status LED flashes or remains constantly on Turn the product off and on again Check the meanings of LED indications in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly see Understanding the LEDs on page 25 A paper jam has occurred Open and close the door see Front view 1 on page 18 Check the instructions on removing jammed paper in this manual and troubleshoot accordingly see Clearing paper jams on page 210 Printouts are blurry The toner level might be low or uneven Shake the t
11. For Mac Open the Applications folder gt Samsung folder gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager The Samsung Easy Printer Manager interface is comprised of various basic sections as described in the table that follows 8 Management tools Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Printer This area gives you general information about your machine Contents Displays information about the selected machine remaining information You can check information such as the machine s model 5 area toner level and paper The information will vary based on the name IP address or Port name and machine status machine selected Some machines do not have this feature Order Click on the Order button from the supply ordering window KU You can view the online Users Guide supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online Troubleshooting button This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the necessary section in the user s guide 4 Select the Help menu or click the 2 button from the window and click on any option you want to know about Application Includes links for changing to the advanced settings switching information Ul refresh preference setting summary help and about 2 The button is used to change the user interface to the advanced settings user interface see Advanced settings user interface overview on page 178 Quick links Displays Quick li
12. Hereby Samsung Electronics declares that this SL K425x K430x K435x X422x X425x X430x series is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R amp TTE C Directive 1999 5 EC The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www samsung com go to Support gt Download center and enter your printer MFP name to browse the EuDoC January 1 1995 Council Directive 2006 95 EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment January 1 1996 Council Directive 2004 108 EC approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility March 9 1999 Council Directive 1999 5 EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their conformity A full declaration defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co Ltd representative 11 Appendix 283 Regulatory information China only PR mj HH Ha Ht AED RRR NARR EE AGA EYA mee a x et Ce Pb Hg Cd Cr PBB PBDE SEAR 0 O 0 0 O O Abi HUB Xx o o o o o ENWI HA 4 PCA xX 0 O 0 Oo o uH ERA X O O 0 O 0 HDB X O O O 0 O LITA x o o o o o BULB X o 0 0 O O Et X O 0 0 O Oo RAE x o o o o o HRX CCD wA X X O 0 O 0 HRIBE
13. Registering your Google account to the printer WA If the network environment is using a proxy server you need to configure the proxy s IP and port number from Settings 5 Network Settings 5 Google Cloud Print gt Proxy Setting Contact your network service Registering from the Chrome Browser provider or network administrator for more information 7 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt Make sure the printer machine is turned on and connected to a wired or Network Settings gt Google Cloud Print wireless network that has access to the Internet You should create your Google account in the advance 8 Enter your printer s name and description 9 Click Register 1 Open the Chrome browser The confirmation pop up window appears 2 Visit www google com K If you set the browser to block pop ups the confirmation window will not appear Allow the site to show pop ups 3 Network setup 338 3 Sign in to the Google website with your Gmail address Google Cloud Print 10 Click Finish printer registration 1 Install the Cloud Print application on your mobile device 11 Click Manage your printers If you do not have the application download it from the application store such as Android Market or App Store 5 Now your printer is registered with Google Cloud Print service Google Cloud Print ready devices will appear in the list Access the Google Docs
14. application from your mobile device Tap the option button of the document that you want to print Printing with Google Cloud Print Tap the send fA button The printing procedure varies depending on the application or the device you p a j are using You can see the application list that supports Google Cloud Print Tap the Cloud Print G3 button service Set the printing options if you want N A wu BW N WA Make sure the printer is turned on and connected to a wired or wireless network that has access to the Internet Tap Click here to Print Printing from the Chrome browser Printing from an application on mobile device The following steps are an example of using the Chrome browser The following steps are an example of using the Google Docs app from Android mobile phone Run Chrome Open the document or email that you want to print Click the wrench icon amp in the browser s top right corner 3 Network setup 339 Click Print A new tab for printing appears A W N Google Cloud Print 5 Select Print with Google Cloud Print 6 Click the Print button 3 Network setup go 4 Maintenance This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine Monitoring the supplies life Setting supplies reorder notification Replacing amp redistributing supplies Finding the serial number Clearing memory Cleaning the machine Tips for storing the machine supplies
15. media Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into the 2J Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before multi purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray loading originals Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and print quality problems see Print media specifications on page 267 Flatten any curl on postcards envelopes and labels before loading them into the multi purpose tray 2 Media and tray 53 Loading paper in the tray 3 Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down 4 Squeeze the multi purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them to the width of the paper Do not force too much otherwise the paper will bend resulting in a paper jam or skew 2 Media and tray 54 Loading paper in the tray 5 When you print a document set the paper type and size for the multi purpose tray see Media sizes automatically detected on page 55 Media sizes automatically detected For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel see Tray Settings on page 62 This machine can automatically detect various sized paper Refer to the table below 9 The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel size Standard Optional dual Multi Duplex To print from an application Plain tray1 2 cassette feeder purpose tray prin
16. He WRH X fe O 0 O O EN AG HBR A ABE PBA X 0 Oo fe o o NOB o o o o o o R Oo 0 O 0 0 O O RATA TEA FB ANING TO He HE SIIT 11363 2006 PEIE NI BR BERL F X BAN EA ERB FEAR EE E UERN AAT maA ARA RURA AMS AA CS KE LANE SIT 11363 2006 ERMEK WERI J o WA MRE AINA ERRER PR aN awn AAH H HH SJ T 11363 2006 faves se O PE EER 11 Appendix 284 Copyright 2014 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved This user s guide is provided for informational purposes only All information included herein is subject to change without notice Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages arising from or related to use of this user s guide Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co Ltd PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company Microsoft Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System Inc ABBYY FineReader Engine for Embedded OS 2009 ABBYY ABBYY FineReader the keenest eye in OCR ABBYY FINEREADER and ABBYY FineReader are registered trademarks of ABBYY Software Ltd All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations Refer to the LICENSE txt file in the provided CD ROM for the open source license information IF YOU USE THI
17. Home Screen Set the wallpaper for the Home Screen Login Screen Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen Home and Login Screens Set the wallpaper for the Home and Login Screens Apps XOA Apps Widgets and Programs Place apps XOA apps widgets and program icons on home screen Folder Create a folder on the home screen Page Add another page to the home screen 1 Introduction EJ j Display screen and useful menu Adding a shortcut from the Apps menu 1 2 3 4 5 Tap the i icon to go to the main home screen Tap the HE icon to view your current applications Scroll through the list and locate the desired application Touch and hold the application icon This creates a shortcut to the application and shows the main home screen Drag the shortcut to a desired position on the screen and release it To move to a different page drag the shortcut to the edge of the screen until the screen scrolls to the desired page Deleting a shortcut 1 2 Touch and hold a shortcut until it becomes movable You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash both items turn red This action does not uninstall a program it only removes the shortcut from the home screen Adding and removing widgets Widgets are self contained applications that reside on your widgets tab and on any page of the home screen Unlike shortcuts a widget appears as an on screen application Adding a widget Tap the O ic
18. O This could result in electric shock or fire and or injury to your pet Operating method A Caution Do not forcefully pull the paper out during printing It can cause damage to the machine X m O Be careful not to put your hand between the machine and paper CEN a tray You may get injured Be care when replacing paper or removing jammed paper New paper has sharp edges and can cause painful cuts O 5 When printing large quantities the bottom part of the paper ea output area may get hot Do not allow children to touch Burns can occur When removing jammed paper do not use tweezers or sharp metal objects 3 It can damage the machine Do not allow too many papers to stack up in the paper output tray pre It can damage the machine 1 Introduction 14 Safety information O Do not block or push objects into the ventilation opening Ay Caution This could result in elevated component temperatures which can cause damage or fire A 0 Before moving the machine turn the power off and disconnect all Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other D r a i i ka f nan cords The information below are only suggestions based on the than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation 8 units weight exposure If you have a medical condition that prevents you from lifting do This machine s power reception device is
19. The administrator should give the right to use the machine to users according to the security policies and procedures The administrator should not use the authority one has over the machine with ill intention The administrator should manage the machine in a trusted network supported environment The administrator should guarantee that the certifying service via certification server is through a safe channel and is safely managed The administrator should provide a Time Stamp feature to keep an accurate system log history The administrator should provide a safe secure network channel with SSL The administrator should save the system log files exported by the Exporting feature in a safe place and protected The administrator should protect the machine from any unauthorized contact with external interfaces 1 About this administrator s guide 292 Terminology used in this guide The following terms are used throughout this guide in examples instructions F 3 Acronyms Meaning and descriptions EAP MS Extensible Authentication Protocol Microsoft Challenge CHAPv2 Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 Synonym IP Internet Protocol HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below HTTPS Hypetettranster ftoc secre Term PERTE a PEAPvO EAP Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol version 0
20. e The type size and weight of the print media for your machine are described in print media specifications see Print media specifications on page 267 e Desired outcome The print media you choose should be appropriate for your project Brightness Some print media are whiter than others and produce sharper more vibrant images Surface smoothness The smoothness of the print media affects how crisp the printing looks on the paper Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this user s guide and still not produce satisfactory results This may be the result of the sheets characteristics improper handling unacceptable temperature and humidity levels or other variables over which cannot be controlled e Before purchasing large quantities of print media ensure that it meets the requirements specified in this user s guide Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause problems or require repairs Such repairs are not covered by Samsung s warranty or service agreements A The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used see Print media specifications on page 267 e Make sure not to use the inkjet photo paper with this machine It could cause damage to the machine e Using inflammable print media can cause a fire e Use designated print media see Print media specifications on page 267 A The use of inflammable media or foreign materials left
21. you can create an overlay matching the layout of the letterhead To print a letter on your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead in the machine just enable the letterhead overlay on your document Off Disables this feature New Create a new page overlay containing your logo or image Overlap Select an overlap location Erase Edge You can copy the original without any edges or margins Off Disables this feature Border Erase Erase an equal amount of edges from all copies Hole Punch Erase Erase hole punch marks from the left edge of copies Image Shift To prevent images from overlapping with staples and other marks you can move an image s position Off Disables this feature Auto Center Automatically position at the center of the paper Custom Shift Adjust the margins of the paper as needed Covers The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken from a different tray Covers must be the same size and orientation as the main body of the job Off Disables this feature Front Print the document with a front cover 4 Copying 106 Understanding the copy screen Back Print the document with a back cover Front amp Back Prints the document with a front and back cover Cover Sheet Sets the option for double sided copying Paper Source Selects the default paper tray to use E Image Adjustment This option allows you to manually adjust the im
22. 343 344 345 346 347 ADVANCED ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE Tips for storing the machine supplies paper Tips for moving the machine Printing a demo page 1 About this administrator s guide This administrator s guide provides advanced information for administrator s to use and manage the machine Your machine provides features that are available only for administrators such as remotely installing the driver or creating the installer package You can also refer to this guide for maintenance information eg cleaning the machine replacing toner cartridges This guide provides instructional screen images easy to read tables of features and step by step instructions Convention 290 Intended audience 291 Security policies for administrators 292 Terminology used in this guide 293 WA Read the safety information before using the machine Terms used in this administrator s guide are explained in the glossary chapter see Glossary on page 369 The illustrations in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or models but the procedures are the same The screenshots in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine depending on the machine s firmware driver version The procedures in this administrator s guide are mainly based on Windows 7 Convention The following table offers the conventions of this guide Convention Description
23. 8 bit per pixel Color Use color 24 bit per pixel each of the RGB channels has 8 bits Add to My Program Add an app to my program list With this feature user can set default settings destinations required for each program Also can set default options as Auto Launch add shortcut to Home Search Search for a desired options Build Job This option can be turned on or off When this option is on After the scanning is finished the Scan More window appears to ask if you want to scan another page If you select Yes then you can scan another page in the current job If you select No then the scanning process is completed and the remainder of the job is performed Attach File Only Allows you to attach a file to your message You can use this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive BOX of the machine to an SMB FTP Email Box USB 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 134 Understanding the fax screen Save as Default Allows you to save the current Scan amp Send settings as the default Scan amp Send settings After you save the default Scan amp Send settings all future send tasks use these settings Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan amp Send settings Restore Default Allows you to restore the Scan amp Send settings to the default Scan amp Send settings of the machine This option changes the current Scan amp Send settings t
24. For example the iPad manual provides these instructions 1 2 3 4 K Open your email photo web page or document you want to print Touch the action icon eg Select your printer driver name and option menu to set up Touch Print button Print it out Cancelling print job To cancel the printing job or view the print summary click the print center icon ip in multitasking area You can click cancel in the print center 3 Network setup Google Cloud Print Google Cloud Print is a service that allows you to print to a printer using your 4 Enter your printer s IP address in the address field and press the Enter key smart phone tablet or any other web connected devices Just register your or click Go Google account with the printer and you are ready to use the Google Cloud Print service You can print your document or email with Chrome OS Chrome browser or a Gmail Google Docs application on your mobile device so you 5 Click Login in the upper right corner of the SyncThru Web Service website don t need to install the printer driver on the mobile device Refer to the Google 6 Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain Then click on website http www google com cloudprint learn or http LOGIN support google com cloudprint for more information about Google Cloud Print Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 296
25. KU Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported Printing from applications There are a lot of Linux applications that allow you to print using Common UNIX Printing System CUPS You can print on your machine from any such application 1 Open the document to print Open the File menu and click Page Setup Page Setup in some 2 applications 3 Choose your paper size orientation and make sure that your machine is selected Click Apply Open the File menu and click Print Select your machine to print Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print Change other printing options in each tab if necessary N Aa UW Kk Click Print 00 9 Automatic manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models You can alternatively use the Ip or lpr printing system or other applications for odd even printing Printing files You can print text image pdf files on your machine using the standard CUPS directly from the commandline interface The CUPS Ip or Ipr utility allows you to do that You can print these files by using below command format Ip d lt printer names o lt option gt lt file name gt Please refer to Ip or lpr man page on your system for more details 3 Printing 94 Linux printing Configuring printer properties You can change the default printing options or connection type with a printing
26. L Some LEDs may not be available depending on model or country see Control panel on page 21 To resolve the error look at the error message and its instructions from the troubleshooting part see Troubleshooting on page 191 You also can resolve the error with the guideline from the computers Samsung Printer Status program window see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 179 If the problem persists call a service representative Status Description Off The machine is off line e The machine is in power save mode Blue On The machine is on line and can be used Blinking Fax The machine is sending or receiving faxes Copy The machine is copying documents Scan The machine is scanning documents Print e When the status LED slowly blinks the machine is receiving data from the computer e When the status LED blinks rapidly the machine is printing data 1 Introduction 25 Understanding the LEDs Status Description Red On Atoner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge e A paper jam has occurred see Clearing paper jams on page 210 e The cover is opened Close the cover e There is no paper in the tray Load paper in the tray see Loading paper in the tray on page 48 e The machine has stopped due to a major error Check the display message see Understanding display messages on page 224 An i
27. Option tray Option tray e Option tray e Option tray Option tray 52dB A 53dB A 54dB A 50dB A 51dB A 52dB A Copying mode Simplex e Tray 1 53dB A Tray 1 55dB A Tray 1 55dB A Tray 1 53dB A Tray 1 54dB A Tray 1 54dB A Duplex Simplex 2dBA e MP 55 dB A MP 57 dB A MP 57dB A MP 55dB A MP 56dB A MP 56dB A e Option tray Option tray Option tray e Option tray e Option tray Option tray 55dB A 57dB A 57dB A 55dB A 56dB A 56dB A Temperature Operation 10 to 32 C 50 to 90 F Storage 20 to 40 C 4 to 104 F Humidity Operation 20 to 80 RH Storage 10 to 90 RH a Sound Pressure Level ISO 7779 Configuration tested machine basic installation A4 paper simplex printing 11 Appendix 265 Specifications Electrical specifications A Power requirements are based on the country region where the device is sold Do not convert operating voltages Doing so might damage the device and void the product warranty Item Description Power rating 110 volt models AC110 127V 220 volt models AC 220 240V Power consumption Average operating mode Less than 1 200 W Ready mode Less than 250 W Power save mode Less than 1 5 W Power off mode Less than OW a see the rating label on the machine for the correct voltage frequency hertz and type of current for your machine b The power consumption may be affected by the machine s status setting conditions operating envi
28. See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate U S A only 11 Appendix Regulatory information China only Fa WSC NF BF WNT RY ASE KATI AZ BEE ENT TALC AF A BB Correct disposal of this product Waste electrical amp electronic equipment RA y YR eH EU AIS BE APE IRS Applicable in countries with separate collection HERRE EEP AN WERIT G RUTH AR HD IRR systems BUNS I PERS y Website http www samsung com cn support location supportServiceLocation do page SERVICE LOCATION pad This marking on the product accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories e g charger headset USB cable should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal please separate these items from other s of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product or their local government office for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal 11 Appendix Regulatory
29. correctly Make sure that the numbers are stored in memory correctly The machine does not send Make sure that the original is loaded in the DSDF or on the scanner glass Check the recipient s fax machine if it has a problem Find the optimal line for communication To check that see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu see General fax settings on page 145 The original does not feed into the machine Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and you are inserting it in correctly Check that the original is the right size not too thick or thin Make sure that the DSDF is firmly closed The DSDF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative The incoming fax has blank spaces or is of poor quality The fax machine sending you the fax may be faulty A noisy phone line can cause line errors Check your machine by making a copy The toner cartridge may be empty Replace the toner cartridge Find the optimal line for communication To check that see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu see General fax settings on page 145 9 Troubleshooting 244 Solving other problems condition Some of the words on an incoming fax are stretched suggested solutions The fax machine sending the fax had a temporary document jam There are lines on the originals you sent Check your scan unit for marks and clean it Cleaning the scan unit The machine dials a number but th
30. the machine machine is in power save mode Wake up the device and wait until the machine returns to ready state Then reinsert the USB Drive back into the USB port on the front of your device Tap Box gt USB from the home screen or Apps 2 3 The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device Touch and hold folder or document you want to print from the list KA If the PDF file you selected is secured with a password you have to know the password for printing Enter the password when the machine requires the secure password If you do not know the password the print job will be cancelled 4 Tap pa gt Print gt Print Options 10 Consumables and accessories 261 Using a USB Drive device You can delete image files stored on a USB Drive one by one or all at once by reformatting the device 2 Tap Box 5 USB from the home screen or Apps Formatting a USB Drive device Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine 3 The machine shows all files in the USB Drive device A After deleting files or reformatting a USB Drive device files cannot be Ba a Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list restored Confirm that you no longer need the data before deleting it ene ena hold Taldera y KA If the file is in a folder press the folder name Deleting an image file Tap gt Format 4 1 Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine 5 Tap Format when th
31. you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using speaker phone Stop Stop a job at any time A popup window appears to GB show the jobs that you can stop g Start Start a job Button Name Description Setting View changed options list Eo History Preview for Shows the job preview a status Preview for Scans for job play a K ir This button appears to edit when scanning Adjust the prescanned image with operation functions such as rotate and crop Start Starts a job 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 133 Understanding the fax screen Adjusting the brightness Selecting the original type You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images Adjust the brightness level using the slider This feature allows you to print dark images lighter or light images darker Tap Darkness to show the slider control Selecting the color mode Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for a copy job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images I Sub menu Action overflow Use one of the following options to use for the scan Mono Use black and white 1 bit per pixel Gray Use grayscale
32. 44 Start Applications and click Image Capture WwW A IfNo Image Capture device connected message appears disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it If the problem continues refer to the Image Capture s help 4 Select the option you want Scan and save your scanned image Ul E If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version Scanning from network connected machine 1 Make sure that your machine is connected to a network Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 44 3 Start Applications and click Image Capture 4 According to OS follow steps below For 10 5 Click Devices gt Browse Devices on Menu bar Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside your machine in Bonjour Devices For 10 6 10 9 select your device below SHARED 5 Set the scan options on this program 6 Scan and save your scanned image 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 125 Mac scanning L If scanning does not operate in Image Capture update Mac OS to the latest version For more information refer to the Image Capture s help You can also scan using TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop You can scan using Samsung Scan Assistant software Open the Applications folder 5 Samsung folder 5 Samsung Scan Assistant 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 126 Linux scann
33. 92 Mac printing Printing on both sides of paper You can print on both sides of the paper Before printing in the duplex mode Click the question mark on the bottom left corner of the window and click on decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document The binding the topic you want to know about A pop up window appears with information options are as follows about that option s feature which is provided from the driver Long Edge Binding This option is the conventional layout used in book saa EI gt Printer 10 88 181 197 ia fa binding Presets Standard iH Short Edge Binding This option is the type often used with calendars t _J cone mi a ages All OFrom 1 to 1 Paper Size A4 BAR 20 99 by 29 70 cm From your Mac application select Print from the File menu Orientation PF 1 layout B Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation on ete Layout Direction S un Gas 1of1 GD Select a binding orientation from Two Sided option ir Two Sided Off l Reverse Page Orientation Select the other options to use Pore Supplies A Low CPi 1 2 3 4 5 Click Print and the machine prints on both sides of the paper A If you print more than 2 copies the first copy and the second copy might print on the same sheet of paper Avoid printing on both sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy 3 Printing B Linux printing
34. Aa Cc The paper may not meet paper specifications for example AaboCc the paper may be too moist or rough see Print media specifications on page 267 e Ifthe entire page is light the print resolution setting is too low or the toner save mode is on Adjust the print resolution and turn the toner save mode off See the help screen of the printer driver e A combination of faded or smeared defects may indicate that the toner cartridge needs cleaning Contact a service representative e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Clean the LSU contact a service representative 9 Troubleshooting Solving other problems Condition Toner specks Suggested Solutions The paper may not meet specifications for example the paper may be too moist or rough see Print media Condition White Spots Suggested Solutions If white spots appear on the page e The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from a paper falls to the inner devices within the machine so the transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative e The paper path may need cleaning Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative A a Cc specifications on page 267 A a C c The transfer roller may be dirty Clean the inside of your Aa Ce machine Contact a service representative A aCe The paper path may need cleaning Contac
35. Cancel the Add window is closed Editing individual addresses in Address Book Check the box for the address you want to edit and click Edit Change the address information Click Apply Click Undo to reverse any changes you entered Click Cancel to close the window without saving any changes Deleting individual addresses in Address Book N VN OA UU KB UW Open a web browser from your networked computer Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Click Login Click Address Book NJ N AQ UU KM UW Open a web browser from your networked computer Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Click Login Click Address Book 7 Setting up an address book Using SyncThru Web Service 8 Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and click Delete Check the box at the top of the column to select all addresses Click OK in the confirmation window to delete the addresses Searching for individual addresses in the address book N S NOU BW Open a web browser from your networked compute
36. Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68 You should also know that e Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system e Ifyou intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine you may experience transmission and reception problems with all the equipment It is recommended that no other equipment except for a regular telephone share the line with your machine 11 Appendix 281 Regulatory information If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the telephone lines Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores When programming emergency numbers and or making test calls to emergency numbers use a non emergency number to advise the emergency service dispatcher of your intentions The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack USOC RJ 11C Replacing the Fitted Plug for UK Only Important The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard BS 1363 13 amp plug and hasa 13 amp fuse When you change o
37. Fax No on the display screen Tap the ID Name input box The pop up keyboard appears Enter your name or the company name see Understanding the pop up keyboard on page 37 Tap Done Tap the Fax Number input box Enter your fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel Tap Done 2g Tap or select other settings Sending a fax 1 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 44 Tap Send from the home screen or Apps 2 3 Adjust the document settings in the Send tab or More tab 4 Tap Band enter a fax number directly using on the screen then tap or using Favorites Recent Groups Contacts tap from the display screen You can send a fax up to 10 destinations at once e You can view and delete a destination from Destination List Bp e To insert a pause tap while entering the fax number A dash appears on the display when a pause is inserted e If you want to use On Hook dial tap and enter a fax number using the numeric keypad on the screen while you hear the dial tone 5 Press KA to start the process 6 Scan amp Send Faxing nat Sending a fax L You can send a fax directly from your computer see Using a fax in your computer on page 130 When you want to cancel a fax job tap BD stop from virtual hard key before the machine starts transmission Or tap J
38. Home Screen 4 Login Screen Set the wallpaper for the Login Screen To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 Homeand Login Screen Set the wallpaper for both screens To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 Tap one of the following options in the next window that appears Gallery Select a wallpaper from photographs and images in the machine s gallery Live wallpapers Select an animated image Wallpapers Select from several built in stationary images Select a wallpaper and tap OK Set wallpaper or Cancel 1 Introduction E Display screen and useful menu Notification Bar The notification bar includes a pull down list to show information about currently running processes toner status screen brightness and recent notifications Ready to Copy On the home screen touch and hold the notification bar until the pull down appears then drag down to expand it When you tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps the screen lists Current Job Completed Job Secure Print Secure Fax and Active Notice Current Job Displays a list of jobs in progress and pending Completed Job Displays a list of the completed jobs including information about jobs in which an error has occurred Secured Print Fax Displays a list of secured jobs For secured print You need to enter the ID and Password set
39. IPX and SPX both provide connection services similar to TCP IP with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP and SPX having similarities to TCP IPX SPX was primarily designed for local area networks LANs and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose typically its performance exceeds that of TCP IP on a LAN Joint Bi level Image Experts Group JBIG is an image compression standard with no loss of accuracy or quality which was designed for compression of binary images particularly for faxes but can also be used on other images Glossary Glossary JPEG MFP Joint Photographic Experts Group JPEG is a most commonly used standard method of lossy compression for photographic images It is the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide Web LDAP Multi Function Peripheral MFP is an office machine that includes the following functionality in one physical body so as to have a printer a copier a fax a scanner and etc MH The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol LDAP is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP IP LED A Light Emitting Diode LED is a semiconductor device that indicates the status of a machine MAC address Media Access Control MAC address is a unique identifier associated with a network adapter MAC address is a unique 48 bit identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs e
40. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the DADF open EI Email Settings Off Disable this feature Set email information such as From Subject and Message Left Page Scans only the left page of the book Right Page Scans only the right page of the book Both Pages From Left Scans both facing pages from the left page 6 Scan amp Send Faxing Understanding the fax screen Original Type Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for the current job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images II Original Size Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals Auto Automatically detect the size of original see Media sizes automatically detected on page 55 Mixed Size Automatically detect the size of original if the original uses a combination of different paper types Custom size If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper use the arrows to set the required size hl Original Orientation Use this option to set the orientation of the original Upright Images The original is in landscape orientation The images or text in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page Sideways Images The original is in portrait orientation The images or
41. PPD file 3 Printing 4 Copying This chapter gives you step by step instructions for copying documents Understanding the copy screen Basic copy Using the Quick Copy menu ID card copying Understanding the copy screen When you tap Copy from the home screen or Apps the Copy screen appears Virtual Hard Key This screen has several tabs and many copying options All the options are grouped by feature so you can configure your selections easily If want to go home tap the home fli button K 2 Help app explains the normal and usual procedure for copying i originals Click the UV Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Virtual hard keys are located on the right side of the screen When an app is launched for the first time the virtual hard keys are shown If the screen is touched the virtual hard keys always appear If the g fora the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown Button Name Description Command keys KJ Reset Reset the current machine s configuration Interrupt Suspend the current job allowing for urgent copying Button Name Description Quick Menu Openthe quick menus Stop Stop a Jee at any time A pop up window appears to show the jobs that you can stop Gs Search Search for a desired menu or app A Start Start a job My Program Add an app to My Program List pa Sub menu Action Open the sub m
42. Quick Copy menu The Quick Copy menu allows you to quickly set common copy options without having to open a lower level menu or another tab However this menu does not offer every copy option available Tap Quick Copy from the home screen or Apps 1 2 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 44 3 Adjust the settings Paper Source Reduce Enlarge Original Orientation Darkness Duplex N UP Collation 4 Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad or button on the control panel if necessary Press Start A on the control panel to begin copying VI 2 To cancel the current copy job tap Stop gt tap Job Status on the control panel Then delete the job you want see Job Status on page 33 4 Copying g ID card copying ca 3 Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid wv Your machine can print 2 sided originals on one sheet The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original This feature is helpful for copying a small sized item such as business card 2 The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature Tap ID Copy from the home screen or Apps 1 a IG 2 If nece
43. Toner Cartridge Stop Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the device s system 9 Troubleshooting 231 Power and cable connecting problems a gs t Click this link to open an animation about solving power problems Condition Suggested solutions The machine is not receiving power or the connection Plug in the power cord and turn on the power switch see Turning on the machine on page 23 cable between the computer and the machine is not Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it see Connecting a network cable on page 22 connected properly 9 Troubleshooting 232 Solving other problems The following chart lists some trouble conditions that may occur and the recommended solutions Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is Paper feeding problems corrected If the problem persists contact a service representative Other problems include Condition Suggested solutions See Display screen problem on page 233 Paper jams during Clear the paper jam see Clearing paper jams on See Paper feeding problems on page 233 printing page 210 See Printing problems on page 234 Paper sticks together Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray see See Printing quality problems on page 237 Print media specifications on page 267 e Make sure that you are using the correct type of paper see Print media specifications on page 267 See Copying problems on page
44. Type drop domn list 3 Select Page Border to print a border around each page on the sheet 4 Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet 2 4 6 9 or 16 in the Pages per Side drop down list 5 Select the page order from the Page Order drop down list if necessary 6 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 7 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing Using special print features Printing posters This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document sal M aib 4 A 3x3 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Click the Basic tab select Poster Printing in the Type drop down list Select the page layout you want Specification of the page layout Select the Poster Overlap value Specify Poster Overlap in millimeters or inches by selecting the radio button on the upper right of Basic tab to make it easier to paste the sheets together 4 1 10 mm C S 10 mm Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window You can complete the poster by pasting the sheets together 7 Printing booklets This fea
45. WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center 0800 10077 WebSite www samsung com EIRE a ie support 800 6225 www samsung com latin support Spanish EL SALVADOR www samsung com latin_en support English ESTONIA 800 7267 www samsung com ee support FINLAND 030 6227 515 www samsung com fi support FRANCE 01 48 63 00 00 www samsung com fr support 0180 6 SAMSUNG bzw www samsung com 0180 6 7267864 de support GERMANY HHP 0180 6 M SAMSUNG bzw 0180 6 67267864 0 20 Anruf aus dem dt Festnetz aus dem Mobilfunk max 0 60 Anruf GEORGIA 0 800 555 555 www samsung com support GHANA 0302 200077 africa_en support 80111 SAMSUNG 80111 726 www samsung com 7864 only from land line gr support GREECE 30 210 6897691 from mobile and land line 1 800 299 0013 www samsung com 1 800 299 0033 latin support Spanish GUATEMALA www samsung com latin_en support English 800 2791 9267 www samsung com 800 2791 9111 BUNn pUppon Spanish HONDURAS www samsung com latin_en support English 852 3698 4698 www samsung com hk support Chinese HONG KONG www samsung com hk_en support English Contact SAMSUNG worldwide 344 Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite HUNGARY 0680SAMSUNG 0680 726 786 www
46. X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 6 Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on 4 Maintenance 354 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the LSU window 1 Open the front door X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 2 Squeeze the left right locking levers and push outward Remove the waste toner container X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Take out the LSU window cleaning stick 4 Maintenance 1355 Cleaning the machine 4 Locate the LSU window cleaning hole and insert the LSU window 6 Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place cleaning stick X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Slowly push and pull the LSU window cleaning stick 4 or 5 times to clean the LSU window 7 Close the front cover Ensure that the cover is securely closed X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 5 Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place K If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 4 Maintenance 356 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the scan unit Keeping the scan unit clean helps to ensure the best possible copy quality We suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each
47. a re dial time using the up down arrows Select 0 to disable redialing Prefix Dial Set the number to be dialed before the destination number Users may use this to access a PABX e g 9 or an area code e g 02 Once this number is set it automatically appears on the screen when entering a phone fax number Option Receive Mode Description Select the fax receiving mode e Telephone Press On Hook Dial and then Start to receive a fax e Fax Receive incoming faxes normally and immediately enter the fax reception mode Answering Machine Fax Use when an answering machine is attached to your machine Your machine answers the incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax Ring to Answer Set the number of times the machine rings before answering an incoming call Dial Mode Set the dialing mode to either tone or pulse This setting may not be available depending on your country ECM Mode Set the machine to correct errors This helps overcome poor line quality and ensures any faxes you send are properly transmitted to any other error correction equipped fax machine Sending a fax in this mode may take more time Modem Speed Set the modem speed 4 8Kbps 33 6Kbps Toll Save Set the machine to send faxes in the toll save time to red
48. and device settings Image tab Contains settings related to image altering 8 Management tools Using Samsung Printer Status The Samsung Printer Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine status TheSamsung Printer Status window and its contents shown in this user s e Check the operating system s that are compatible with your machine see System requirements on page 270 e Available for Windows OS users only Samsung Printer Status overview If an error occurs while operating you can check the error from the Samsung Printer Status Samsung Printer Status is installed automatically when you install the machine software You can also launch Samsung Printer Status manually Go to the Printing Preferences click the Basic tab 5 Printer Status button These icons appear on the Windows task bar Description guide may differ depending on the machine or operating system in use Icon Mean Normal The machine is in ready mode and experiencing no errors or warnings a Warning The machine is in a state where an error might occur in the future For example it might be in toner low status which may lead to toner empty status L Error The machine has at least one error P 2 supplies Information 3 Printer Status Option 4 Order Supplies 5 Cancel Print 1 User s Guide 8 Management tools Using Samsung Printer Sta
49. background This feature is also available from the machine see Print Settings on page 309 Copy You can set copy related settings such as darkness or adjusting the background This feature is also available from the machine see Setting options on page 102 Fax You can set fax related settings such as fax number or redial times This feature is also available from the machine see Understanding the fax screen on page 132 8 Management tools 168 i SyncThru Web Service Scan amp Send You can set scan related settings This feature is also available from the machine see Understanding the Scan amp Send screen on page 113 Box You can set box related settings This feature is also available from the machine see Using Box on page 188 Address Book Settings This address book contains contacts that are available to all users You can use the address book to make contacts available to anyone who uses the machine E mail Notification When an error occurs or the consumables are running out the machine sends a notification to the administrator via e mail You can set whether to use this feature or not You can also select which alerts to receive and when Network Settings You can set up the network environment to use your machine as a network machine You can also set the settings from the machine Refer to the network setup chapter see Network setup on page 318 General You can set gener
50. by job types Print Copy Fax Print Report Total All Tap and select Send Usage Shows the count of Send Email SMB FTP USB PC Others jobs Fax Send Usage PSTN Shows the count of Fax Send Usage User Usage Login user only Each category shows the printing usage by user 1 Introduction 34 Display screen and useful menu To use User Usage you may need to select to Application Authentication and Standard Accounting Only from Settings 5 Admin Settings 5 Security gt Mode or Method on the home screen or Apps To use the USB feature tap Box 5 USB on the home screen or Apps see Using a USB Drive device on page 259 WA To use this feature you need to insert a USB memory device into the USB port on your machine Help provides online information to help with your machine questions The Help app provides information about the menus and functions available in the machine Use the pane on the left side of the screen to navigate the Help app You can also select the headings below each section to browse the help topics 1 Tap Help from the home screen or Apps The Help screen is displayed Select a topic and follow the built in navigation N z Click the pm Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about My Page The My Page app allows you to easily change your profile information and settings Your My Page
51. clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 4 Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 9 If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate 9 Troubleshooting 193 Replacing the toner cartridge The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K When the toner cartridge is totally empty e The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message of replacing toner e The machine stops printing and incoming faxes are saved in memory However when the color toner cartridges are empty but there is toner left in the black toner cartridge you can still print black and white print jobs the submitted job must be in black and white e Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine see Consumables and accessories on page 249 At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced KA Click this link to open an animation about replacing the toner cartridge X422x X425x X430x X40x series Click this link to open an animation about replacing the toner cartridge K
52. connected properly Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect it The connection cable between the computer and the machine is defective If possible attach the cable to another computer that is working properly and print a job You can also try using a different machine cable 9 Troubleshooting 234 Solving other problems Condition The machine does not print Possible cause The port settingis incorrect Suggested solutions Check the Windows printer setting to make sure that the print job is sent to the correct port If the computer has more than one port make sure that the machine is attached to the correct one The machine may be configured incorrectly Check the Printing Preferences to ensure that all of the print settings are correct see Opening printing preferences on page 68 The printer driver may be incorrectly installed Repair the machine software The machine is malfunctioning Check the display message on the control panel to see if the machine is indicating a system error Contact a service representative The document size is so big that the hard disk space of the computer is insufficient to access the print job If printing GUI make more hard disk space available for your print job and try printing the document again The machine selects print materials from the wrong paper source The paper option that was selected in the
53. driver can be installed only on Windows Vista OS or higher O Multiple pages per sheet e Supported Blank Not supported Booklet printing 3 Printing Gg Basic printing e Mac printing see Mac printing on page 92 e Linux printing see Linux printing on page 94 e UNIX printing see UNIX printing on page 96 The following Printing Preferences window is for Notepad in Windows 7 Your Printing Preferences window may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 1 Open the document you want to print 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer list General Select Printer Status Ready C Print to file Location comer FP Page Range All Number of copies 1 4 T13 1 l3 The basic print settings including the number of copies and print range are selected within the Print window To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver click Properties or Preferences in the application s Print window to change the print setting see Opening printing preferences on page 68 4 To start the print job click OK or Print in the Print window 3 Printing 66 i Basic printing Canceling a print job If the print job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows You can access this window by simply double clicking t
54. email address set here This feature is also available from the machine see Contact Information on page 317 Feature Management You can enable disable network features Check the features you want to enable and click Apply Information Hiding You can enable disable network features Check the features you want to enable and click Apply Restart Device You can reboot your machine Click the Restart Now button to reboot 8 Management tools 169 i SyncThru Web Service Network Security From the SyncThru Web Service select the Security tab gt Network Security Digital Certificate You can manage digital certificates A digital certificate is an electronic certificate that verifies the secure association between communication nodes You need to add the certificate for SSL communication This feature is also available from the machine see Network Security on page 316 Secure Connection You can enable or disable secure connection to use more enhanced secure network channel For secure communication using the Secure Connection feature is recommended SNMPv3 You can set SNMPv3 IP Security You can set IP security settings IP MAC Filtering You can set filtering options for IP and MAC addresses If the administrator does not add a filtering rule for IPv4 IPv6 and MAC addresses nothing is filtered If the administrator has added a filtering rule filtering will be applied to the entered IPv4 I
55. get confirmation on executed Scan amp Send destination s successfully or After the scanning is finished the Scan More window appears to ask if you not want to scan another page If you select Yes then you can scan another page in the current job If you select No then the scanning process is completed and the remainder of the job is performed KU If the report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters fonts Build Job This option can be turned on or off When this option is on Attach File Only Allows you to attach a file to your message You can use this option to quickly send one or more files from the hard disk drive BOX of the machine to an SMB FTP Email Box USB tMe Setting Allows you to select the default destination for the send job When logged in you can select your any Send destination as the default send destination Same will appear in Scan amp Send widgets too Send to PC Scans and sends scanned output to a computer 5 Scan amp Send Scanning KO j Understanding the Scan amp Send screen Address Book Settings This address book contains contacts that are Setting options available to all users You can use the address book to make contacts available to anyone who uses the machine You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab Google Address Book This address book contains the con
56. in the printer driver set in the printer see Print Mode on page 74 For secured fax you need to enter the Password Active Notice Displays any error messages and codes that have occurred 1 Introduction EF Display screen and useful menu You can check how many pages jobs were printed copied scanned and faxed out You can check the counter by device or users Tab Counter from the home screen or Apps 2 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information tab gt Usage Counters see Counter on page 34 12 00 k 3 Total Usage all feral Lago Total 92 used Fror co co 4 Send Usage E Moo Ml Eco E Fax Send Usage PSTN 2 User Usage ee lb Category Print Copy Fax Print Report Total Mono Simplex 9 59 0 24 92 Mono Duplex 0 0 0 0 0 Mono Eco Ratio 0 0 0 0 N A N A 0 0 A na ta Q Q Command keys Button Name Quick Menu Description Open the quick menu ey Search Search for a desired menu or app Print You can print a usage counter report My Program Open a list of the apps you added All Period Select the period of checking counter From To Set the period of checking counter Understanding the Counter menu Total Usage Each category shows the usage count
57. in the printer may lead to overheating of the unit and in rare cases may cause a fire The amount of paper put into the tray may differ according to media type used see Print media specifications on page 267 2 Media and tray Loading paper in the tray Standard tray optional dual cassette feeder Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs into the standard tray The standard tray can hold a maximum of 1 040 sheets of plain paper You can purchase an optional dual cassette feeder and attach it below the standard tray to load an additional 1 040 sheets of plain paper Standard tray contains two trays Tray 1 Tray 2 e Optional dual cassette feeder contains two trays Tray 3 Tray 4 e The process to load paper in tray 1 tray 2 tray 3 and tray 4 is the same Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems that require repairs Such repairs are not covered by the warranty or service agreements 1 Squeeze the lock lever on the handle and pull out the tray 2 Media and tray Loading paper in the tray 2 Squeeze the paper length guide and pull it to the end of the tray 3 Squeeze the paper width guide and pull it to the end of the tray 1 Paper length guide 1 Paper width guide Flex and fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading papers 2 Media and tray ao j Loading paper in the tray 5 Load
58. information The United States of America only Radio frequency emissions Dispose unwanted electronics through an approved recycler To find the nearest recycling location go to our website www samsung com recyclingdirect Or call 877 278 0799 FCC information to the user This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions State of California Proposition 65 Warning USA Only This device may not cause harmful interference and e This device must accept any interference received including interference The California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act requires the Governor of California that may cause undesired operation to publish a list of chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity and requires businesses to warn of potential exposure to such chemicals This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class WARNING This product contains chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed birth defects or other reproductive harm to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential This appliance can cause low level exposure to the chemicals g which can be minimized by operating the appliance in a well ventilated area installation This equipment g
59. name the machine does not create a sub folder e Folder Creation Cycle Set the cycle of sub folder creation The machine creates sub folders according to this option If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same name the machine does not create a sub folder Every Day A sub folder is created every day using the name format YYYY MM DD for example 2014 01 01 Every Month A sub folder is created every month using the name format YYYY MM for example 2014 01 Every Year A sub folder is created every year using the name format YYYY for example 2014 e Create Group For Multiple Files If you select this option and scan multiple files the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected to store all sent files If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time sent files are stored as below When asingle scanned file is sent folder user name 2014 01 01 DOC jpg When multiple scanned files are sent folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC000 jpg 7 Setting up an address book 151 Using the control panel folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC001 jpg folder user name 2014 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC002 jpg Storing address groups Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps gt Groups gt F on the 7 TapOKto save the information 1 display screen Tap the Name input field and enter a name for the group e e e e 2 Editing Individual address T
60. not supply enough toner Remove seal tape of toner cartridge or shake it Call for service if the problem persists Meaning The machine cannot detect a toner cartridge Or not removed seal tape of toner cartridge Suggested solutions Remove the sealing tape from the toner cartridge Refer to Quick Install Guide Door is open Close it The door is not securely latched Close the door until it locks into place End of life Replace with new imaging unit The indicated imaging unit has reached its estimated imaging unit life Replace the imaging unit with a Samsung genuine imaging unit see Replacing the imaging unit on page 197 End of life Replace with new toner cartridge The indicated toner cartridge has reached its estimated cartridge life Replace the toner cartridge witha Samsungg enuine toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 194 Engine System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the engine system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service 9 Troubleshooting 224 j Understanding display messages Message Fuser Unit Failure error number Turn off then on Fuser Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists Meaning There is a problem in the fuser unit Suggested solutions Turn the machine off and back on aga
61. nue CE MS CHAPv2 Extensible Authentication Protocol Microsoft Challenge Document original Handshake Authentication Protocol version 2 Paper media print media SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Machine printer MFP device MFP Multi Functional Peripheral Multi Functional Printer User s Guide manual guide SIN Serial Number SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Acronyms TLS Transport Layer Security The following acronyms are used throughout this guide in examples UPnP Universal Plug and Play instructions and deschipyions MDNS Multicast Domain Name System LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Acronyms Meaning ae SLP Service Location Protocol DBMS Data Base Management System SMB Server Message Block EAP MD5 Extensible Authentication Protocol Message Digest 5 v g 1 About this administrator s guide 293 Terminology used in this guide Acronyms Meaning SWS SyncThru Web Service WINS Windows Internet Name Service WSD Web Service for Device See Glossary on page 369 1 About this administrator s guide 294 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu This chapter explains the Settings menu provided by your machine The Settings menu provides various options for administrators to set in order to use the machine to its full capabilities Log in 296 Language and Input 297 Machine 298 Admin Settings 303 Management 311 Network Settings 313 System 317 Thi
62. of the DNS server you want to use as an alternative Dynamic DNS Registration If you want to use check the checkbox es of dynamic DNS registration If this option is checked the machine registers its host name and domain name to configured DNS servers dynamically Also if this option is checked and DHCP is selected DHCP FQDN options are automatically disabled WINS Windows Internet Name Service You can configure the WINS server WINS is used in the Windows operating system Select this option Display IP address You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Notification Bar If you select this option the IP address will show on the Notification Bar TCP IPv6 You can set the IPv6 settings Tap Settings 5 Network Settings 5 Ethernet 5 TCP IPv6 from the home screen or Apps 2 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 168 Protocol Tap to use IPv6 protocol in the system Reboot the machine to apply the change IPv6 Address Shows the IPv6 address types sab Link local Address This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value FE80 This address has local link scope and is automatically generated Stateless Address This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router advertised prefix and interface identifier On a interface like Ethernet interface i
63. of the page 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 119 j Understanding the Scan amp Send screen Color Mode Ed Background Adjustment Use one of these options to scan the original among Color Gray or Mono This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the f background such as newspapers or catalogs You can use the options in this Mono Displays an image in black and white g f P P g P menu to make the copies easier to read Gray Displays an image in gray Background Density Allows you to adjust the density of the background Color Displays an image in color in the scanned image This feature is useful when scanning originals that have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background The file format JPEG cannot be selected in the File Format option if Mono Backside Image Allows you to erase any text or images that show through has been selected for Color Mode from the other side of the original You can use this feature to ensure that your scanned output is clearly legible Image Adjustment This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness Sharpness and Contrast Darkness Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file This feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little contrast Sharpness Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images Cont
64. on system before being specified by command Description Printer port name can be specified as IP address hostname USB local port name IEEE1284 port name or network path For example P XXX XXX XXX XXX in where XXxX XXX XXX XXX means IP address for network printer p USB001 P LPT1 p hostname e p computer_name shar ed_printer or XXX XXX XXX XXX shared_ printer in where computer_name share d_printer or XXX XXX XXX XXX shared_ printer means the network path to the printer by entering two slashes the computer name or local IP address of the PC sharing the printer and then the share name of the printer Command line a dest paths or A lt dest_path gt Definition Specifies destination path for installation KA The destination path should be a fully qualified path Description Since machine drivers should be installed on the OS specific location this command applies to only application software n Printer name gt or N lt Printer name gt Specifies printer name Printer instance shall be created as specified printer name With this parameter you can add printer instances as your wishes nd or ND Commands not to set the installed driver as a default machine driver It indicates installed machine driver will not be the default machine driver on your system if
65. options that appear in the Scan amp Send menu Tap the or symbol on the menu icons to add or remove menus You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus Job progress This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job Detail Tap this button to see the status type and time of the job Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings such as the orientation and size of the printout Send Feedback Allows you to send feedback about the current send job If you want to receive sending job by email you can set from My page app see Understanding the My Page menu on page 36 To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 135 Understanding the fax screen Setting options 2Sided Calendar For originals that are printed on both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees You can set a detail options in the Send tab and More tab K To use 2 Sided Book and 2 Sided Calendar load the originals on the DADPF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF it automatically changes to 1 Sided KA e You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option Send 5 pas Sub menu action overflow gt UI Configuration Some menus are disabled If so
66. original is a mix of text and images Set the sending options for fax such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Off Disables this feature i i i i i fax right after th m Quick Start Fax The machine ha begin to transmit the fax right a er e ol Original Size first page has been scanned Originals with many pages can be sent this way without overflowing the machine s memory Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals Delay Send Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time Define the Auto Automatically detect the size of original see Media sizes Job Name and Start Time automatically detected on page 55 Mixed Size Automatically detect the size of original if the original uses a e You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours combination of different paper types after the scan Custom size If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper use the arrows to set the required size GI Email Settings 25 Original Orientation Set email information such as From Subject and Message Use this option to set the orientation of the original Upright Images The original is in landscape orientation The images or text in the original are parallel to the long edge of the page Sideways Images The original is in portrait orientation The images or text in the original are perpendicular to the long edge
67. overwrite secure non volatile memory If you want to secure memory space you can manually overwrite secure non volatile memory You can set the machine to repeat the manual image overwrite after the system is rebooted Scheduled Image Overwrite you can set the schedule to manually overwrite the image Overwrite Method You can select the method for overwriting the secure non volatile memory hard German VSITR Select to overwrite the memory 7 times When overwriting for the 6 times alternate 0x00 and OXff are used to overwrite the disk and in the 7th time the disk is written with OxAA DoD5220 28 M Select to overwrite the memory 3 times When overwriting three times patterns 0x35 OXCA 0x97 are used to overwrite the disk s content This method of overwriting the disk is specified by US DoD Australian ACSI 33 Select to overwrite the memory 5 times When overwriting 5 times character C and its complement alternatively are used to overwrite the disk After the 2nd time there is a mandatory validation For the 5th time random data is used DoD 5220 22M ECE Select to overwrite the memory 3 times When overwriting three times patterns 0x35 OxCA 0x97 are used to overwrite the disk s content This method of overwriting the disk is specified by US DoD Custom Overwrite Select to determine the number of times the memory will be overwritten The hard disk will be overwritten as many times as the number you se
68. problem persists call for service Imaging unit is not compatible Check users guide The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine see Available Consumables on page 251 Imaging unit is not installed Install the unit The imaging unit is not installed or the imaging unit is not properly installed Install the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists call for service 9 Troubleshooting 225 j Understanding display messages Message Install toner cartridge Meaning The toner cartridge is not installed or the toner cartridge is not properly installed Suggested solutions Install the toner cartridge If it is already installed try to reinstall the toner cartridge If the problem persists call for service Message Load tray number with Letter Plain paper Meaning Thepapersize specified in the printer properties does not match the paper you are loading Suggested solutions Load the correct paper in the tray Input System Failure error number Check HCF number connection There is a problem in the HCF Open and close the HCF If the problem persists call for service LSU Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the LSU Turn the machin
69. receives the fax Press the buttons slowly in sequence If you still hear the fax tone from the remote machine try pressing 9 once again 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 143 Receiving a fax Tab On to enable this feature N 2 e Ifyou have set your machine to this mode and your answering machine is turned off or no answering machine is connected to the EXT socket your machine automatically enters Fax mode after a predefined number When the machine receives a fax in this mode Print option becomes of rings available If you want to print the secured faxes tap Print All secured faxes If your answering machine has a configurable ring counter set it to will then be printed answer incoming calls before it rings more than once l Ifyou are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is connected to your machine you must switch off the answering machine 3 Ifyou want to set a passcode tab the passcode blank and enter a Otherwise outgoing messages from the answering machine will passcode interrupt your phone conversations 4 If you want incoming faxes to be always saved to memory tap Whole Day Otherwise proceed to the next step a Fx 5 Tap Start Time and set the specific start time using the up down Receiving in Secure Receive mode buttons Tap Set when finished You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by 6 TapEndTimeand set the specific end time using the up down button
70. samsung com KENYA 0800 545 545 www samsung com 0680PREMIUM 0680 773 648 Mu support support a 1800 3000 8282 Toll Free www samsung com Maa a a aED a Cony ae support English 1800 266 8282 Toll Free in support KUWAIT pp j www samsung com INDONESIA 021 56997777 www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic PAJUN TAPADA Pea 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com KYRGYZSTAN IRAN 021 8255 www samsung com kz ru support Iran 8Uppor LATVIA 8000 7267 www samsung com 800 SAMSUNG 800 7267864 www samsung com lv support ITALIA HHP 800 Msamsung Support LITHUANIA 8 800 77777 www samsung com 800 67267864 It support 1 800 234 7267 www samsung com LUXEMBURG 261 03 710 www samsung com JAMAICA 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 latin_en support support English MACAU 0800 333 www samsung com JAPAN 0120 363 905 www samsung com support jp support MACEDONIA 023 207 777 0800 22273 www samsung com JORDAN PET levant support 1800 88 9999 www samsung com English MALAYSIA 603 77137477 Overseas my support contact KAZAKHSTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 GSM 7799 www samsung com VIP care 7700 support MEXICO 01 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com mx support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide ga i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region NICARAGUA Customer Care Center 001 800 5077267 WebSite www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English
71. size custom 297 x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 inches 60 to 220 g m 16 to 59 Ib bond Multipurpose tray minimum size custom 98 x 148 mm 3 87 x 5 82 inches Multipurpose tray maximum size custom a Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight thickness and environmental conditions 297 x 432 mm 11 7x 17inches b The smoothness of the labels used in this machine is 100 to 250 sheffield This means the numeric level of smoothness 60 to 176 g m 16 to 47 Ib bond 11 Appendix 269 i Specifications System requirements Microsoft Windows Operating system Requirement recommended CPU RAM free HDD space Windows XP Intel Pentium IlI 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 256 MB 1 5 GB Windows Server 2003 Intel Pentium III 933 MHz Pentium IV 1 GHz 128 MB 512 MB 1 25 GB to 2 GB Windows Server 2008 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz Pentium IV 2 GHz 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Windows Vista Intel Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB 1 GB 15 GB Windows 7 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 1 GB 2 GB 16 GB Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Server 2008 R2 Intel Pentium IV 1 4 GHz x64 processors 2 GHz or faster 512 MB 2 GB 10 GB Windows 8 Intel Pentium IV 1 GHz 32 bit or 64 bit processor or higher 2 GB 20 GB Windows 8 1 Support for Dire
72. speaker phone Stop Stop a job at any time A popup window appears to show the jobs that you can stop g Start Start a job 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 114 Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Preview Adjusting the brightness Preview displays the original scanned image Button Name Description Setting View changed options list E i History Preview for Shows the job preview status Preview for Scans for job play pa KU e This button appears to edit when scanning Adjust the prescanned image with operation functions such as rotate and crop Start Starts a job You can adjust the brightness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images Adjust the brightness level using the slider This feature allows you to print dark images lighter or light images darker Tap Darkness to show the slider control Selecting the color mode Use one of the following options to use for the scan Mono Use black and white 1 bit per pixel Gray Use grayscale 8 bit per pixel Color Use color 24 bit per pixel each of the RGB channels has 8 bits 5 Scan amp Send Scanning KO Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Selecting the original type SaveasDefault Allows you to save the current Scan amp Send settings as the default Scan amp Send settings After you save the default Scan amp Send settings all futu
73. tab gt Individual Select Export from the Task drop down list Select the option you want and click the Export button Then the address book file stored in your computer 7 Setting up an address book 159 Using SyncThru Web Service Grouping addresses in address book 2 If you do not want to add individual addresses to the group address you made skip this step You can add individual addresses next time pressing Group Details 1 Open a web browser from your networked computer 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 12 Click Apply 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page 13 Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book Click Login J 14 Click the arrow in the middle The selected addresses are added in Group 5 Enter your ID and password and select a domain as you log in the Address Book machine Click Apply Click Login 15 PES Click Address Book Editing address groups in Address Book 1 Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser Click Add Group 6 7 8 Click Groups 9 2 Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in a browser 1 0 Enter the group name to be added in Group Name Example http 123 123 123 123 11 Check Add individual s after this group is created 3 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows 4 Click Logi
74. text in the original are perpendicular to the long edge of the page Color Mode Use one of these options to scan the original among Color Gray or Mono Mono Displays an image in black and white Gray Displays an image in gray Color Displays an image in color K JPEG file format cannot be selected if color mode is set as MONO zy Image Adjustment This option allows you to manually adjust the image Darkness Allows you to adjust the darkness of the scanned output file This feature is useful when scanning faded originals or originals with little contrast Sharpness Allows you to adjust the edges of text so that it is easier to read You can also use this feature to enhance the details of images Contrast allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output crisper or smoother You can use this feature to improve the quality of an image or increase the readability of text 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 138 Understanding the fax screen ANG eee as This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the background such as newspapers or catalogs You can use the options in this menu to make the copies easier to read Background Density Allows you to adjust the density of the background ao ire a 2 in the scanned image This feature is useful when scanning originals that Keypad Favorite Recent Groups Contacts have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background Backsid
75. the PCL font list PS Font List Print to see the PS font list 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 312 Network Settings This option is setting the Network Settings functions 9 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e Click the v Help from the home screen or H quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about Tap Settings gt Network Settings from the home screen or Apps Feature Description Ethernet Port You can enable disable ethernet port Ethernet Speed You can select the speed rate of ethernet MAC Address Shows the Mac address of the machine IP Setting You can set the TCP IPv4 IP setting DNS Configuration You can set the DNS setting WINS You can configure the WINS server Display IP Address You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Home screen Feature Description Protocol You can enable disable IPv6 protocol IPv6 Address You can set the IPv6 address types DHCPv6 Configuration You can set the DHCPv6 configuration DHCP Unique Identifier Show the DHCP Unique Identifier 802 1x You can enable disable 802 1x Security 802 1x Authentication Method You can select the authentication algorithm to use DHCPv6 Identity Association Show the DHCP Identity Association Identifier Identifier TCP IPv4 You can set IPv4 settings IP Setting You
76. the paper is loaded properly AaB b Check the paper type and quality see Print media A aB b specifications on page 267 A aB b H Ensure that the paper or other material is loaded correctly A aB b C and the guides are not too tight or too loose against the Aa Bb C paper stack Ensure that the standard tray right bottom door dual cassette feeder right bottom door or high capacity feeder right bottom door is securely closed If the bottom doors are not completely closed open and close the bottom doors Condition Wrinkles or creases AaBbCc Suggested Solutions e Ensure that the paper is loaded properly e Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 267 e Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Ensure that the standard tray right bottom door dual cassette feeder right bottom door or high capacity feeder right bottom door is securely closed If the bottom doors are not completely closed open and close the bottom doors Curl or wave Ensure that the paper is loaded properly Check the paper type and quality Both high temperature and humidity can cause paper curl see Print media specifications on page 267 Turn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray Back of printouts are dirty AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc BbCc Check for leaking toner Clea
77. the power cord not lift the machine Ask for help and always use the appropriate To switch off the power supply remove the power cord from the amount of people to lift the device safety The machine could fall electrical outlet causing injury or machine damage Then lift the machine e Ifthe machine weighs under 20 kg 44 09 Ibs lift with 1 person Installation Moving Ifthe machine weighs 20 kg 44 09 Ibs 40kg 88 18 Ibs lift with 2 people e If the machine weighs more than 40 kg 88 18 Ibs lift with 4 or more people A warning ee Choose a flat surface with enough space for ventilation to place the machine Also consider the space required to open the cover Do not place the machine in an area with dust humidity or water and trays leaks The place should be well ventilated and be far from direct light This could result in electric shock or fire heat and humidity Place the machine in the environment where it meets the Da When using the machine for a long period of time or printing a operating temperature and humidity specification a large number of pages in a non ventilated space it could pollute R the air and be harmful to your health Place the machine in a well Otherwise quality problems can occur and cause damage to the l i dpa ventilated space or open a window to circulate the air periodically machine see Environmental specifications on page 265 1 Introduction 1
78. there are one or more printer drivers installed If there is no installed machine driver on your system then this option won t be applied because Windows OS will set installed printer driver as a default machine driver 3 Network setup gg Installing driver over the network Command line x or X Definition Uses existing machine driver files to create printer instance if it is already installed Description This command provides a way to install a printer instance that uses installed printer driver files without installing an additional driver up lt printer name gt or UP lt printer Removes only specified printer instance and not the driver files This command provides a way to remove only specified printer instance from your system without effecting name gt other printer drivers It will not remove printer driver files from your system dor Uninstalls all device This command will remove all D drivers and applications installed device drivers and from your system application software from your system v lt share name gt or V lt share name gt Shares installed machine and add other available platform drivers for Point amp Print It will install all supported Windows OS platform s machine drivers to system and share it with specified lt share name gt for point and print oor O Opens Printers and Faxes folder after i
79. to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond e 50 sheets stacking 11 Appendix 268 i Specifications print media weight Capacity Simplex Type Size Dimensions tray1 2 3 4 multipurpose tray Recycled Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib bond 60 to 90 g m 16 to 24 Ib bond Eon e 400 sheets stacking e 100 sheets stacking Bond Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 105 to 120g m 28 to 32 Ib bond 105 to 120g m 28 to 32 Ib bond von e 350 sheets stacking 20 sheets stacking Archive Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section section Letter Head Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond Hole Punched section e 400 sheets stacking e 50 sheets stacking Thin cardstock Thin glossy Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 106 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib bond e 350 sheets stacking 106 to 163 g m 28 to 43 Ib bond e 20 sheets stacking Labels Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 2 3 4 120 to 150 g m 32 to 40 Ib bond 20 sheets stacking Tray 1 minimum size custom 148 x 210 mm 5 85 x 8 27 inches Tray 1 maximum size custom 297 x 364 mm 11 7 x 14 3 inches Tray 2 3 4 minimum size custom 148 x 210 mm 5 85 x 8 27 inches Tray 2 3 4 maximum
80. to communicate with each other The SSIDs are case sensitive and have a maximum length of 32 characters Transmission Confirmation Report TCR provides details of each transmission such as job status transmission result and number of pages sent This report can be set to print after each job or only after failed transmissions TIFF Tagged Image File Format TIFF is a variable resolution bitmapped image format TIFF describes image data that typically come from scanners TIFF images make use of tags keywords defining the characteristics of the image that is included in the file This flexible and platform independent format can be used for pictures that have been made by various image processing applications Glossary Glossary Toner Cartridge USB A kind of bottle or container used in a machine like a printer which contains toner Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers which forms the text and images on the printed paper Toner can be fused by by a combination of heat pressure from the fuser causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper TWAIN An industry standard for scanners and software By using a TWAIN compliant scanner with a TWAIN compliant program a scan can be initiated from within the program It is an image capture API for Microsoft Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems UNC Path Universal Serial Bus USB is a standard that was developed by the USB Implementers For
81. to the average printing power consumption in this machine e The actual saved or reduced amount may differ depending on the operating system used computing performance application software connection method media type media size job complexity etc Use the Samsung tab to display the copyright and the version number of the driver If your computer is connected to the Internet you can have access to services 3 Printing Opening printing preferences This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file by using the HDD in your machine The default Print Mode is Normal which is for printing without storing the printing file on the HDD You can also use this option in other tabs Normal This mode prints without storing your document Proof This mode is useful when you print more than one copy You can print one copy first to check then print the rest of the copies later Confidential This mode is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print it see Job Status on page 33 Store This mode is used only for storing documents on the HDD If necessary you can load and print the stored documents You can find the stored file in the Box see Using Box on page 188 First choose a document box in Save Location and then set Options Store and Print This mode is used when printing and storing documents at the same time If necessary you can load and print the stored docume
82. want to know about You can set general options see Setting options on page 117 No contacts Contacts Displays the name and contact information of contacts saved in the address book Favorites Displays the name and contact information of contacts marked as favorites in the address book Groups Lists the groups registered in the address book and the users registered to those groups 7 Setting up an address book 149 Understanding the address screen Command keys 2 You cannot add a group as a member of another group in on page 296 e To use some features you may need to log in as an administrator see Log Button Name Description Quick Menu Show the quick menu Address book Open your list of addresses a Search Search for a desired address F Add Add a contact favorites or group Edit Select the address you want to edit and tap this Kal button My Program Shows list of added programs Sub menu Action Open the sub menu E overflow kba Sub menu Action overflow To use some features you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 Search Searches the names and contact information in the Contacts list Delete Contacts Delete the contacts you set Import You can import the address book saved from another MFP or same MFP Export You can export the address book saved from another MFP or same MFP 7 Setting up an ad
83. when the toner cartridge is empty but you can still print black and white print jobs The submitted job must be in black and white Check the type of the toner cartridge for your machine see Ordering supplies and accessories on page 250 At this stage the toner cartridge needs to be replaced Be sure to prepare new toner cartridge in advance see Ordering supplies and accessories on page 250 How to replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 194 Replacing the imaging unit When the imaging unit is totally empty The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message of replacing imaging unit Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine Ordering supplies and accessories on page 250 At this stage the imaging unit needs to be replaced Be sure to prepare a new imaging unit in advance see Ordering supplies and accessories on page 250 How to replace the imaging unit see Replacing the imaging unit on page 197 Redistributing toner When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life White streaks or light printing occurs Toner low related message appears on the display The Status LED blinks red If this happens you can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge In some cases white streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the toner How to redistribute the toner s
84. 08 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with 2 If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers group permission can start a print job connected with selected printer 3 Printing 8o Setting Device Options If you want to encrypt job accounting password check Job Accounting Password Encryption Custom Paper Size Settings You can specify custom paper size 7 Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window 3 Printing EJ Printing to a file PRN You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file To create a file 1 Check the Print to file box at the Print window General Select Printer Status Ready Print to file L Page Range ay Number of copies 1 s 3 I 3 2 Click Print 3 Type in the destination path and the file name and then click OK For example c Temp file name If you type in only the file name the file is automatically saved in My Documents Documents and Settings or Users The saved folder may differ depending on your operating system or the application you are using 3 Printing EI Mac printing Some features may not be available depending on models or options It Changing printer settings means that the features ar
85. 15 Safety information Do not place the machine on an unstable surface The machine could fall causing injury or machine damage Use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone line cord if necessary Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine Make sure you plug the power cord into a grounded electrical outlet Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire oO O OO Use the power cord supplied with your machine for safe operation If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 meters 6 feet with a 110V machine then the gauge should be 16 AWG or larger Otherwise it can cause damage to the machine and could result in electric shock or fire O Do not put a cover over the machine or place it in an airtight location such as a closet If the machine is not well ventilated this could result in fire O Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords This can diminish performance and could result in electric shock or fire The machine should be connected to the power level which is specified on the label If you are unsure and want to check the power level you are using contact the electrical utility company a AWG American Wire Gauge Maintenance Checking A Caution O a ae Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning the inside of the machine Do not clean the machine with benzene paint thinner or alcohol do not spray water directly in
86. 242 See Scanning problems on page 243 Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the paper See Operating system problems on page 245 e Humid conditions may cause some paper to stick together Try a fresh ream of paper See Fax problems optional on page 244 Multiple sheets of e Different types of paper may be stacked in the tray Display screen problem paper do not feed Load paper of only one type size and weight e If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam clear the paper jam see Clearing paper jams on page 210 Condition Suggested solutions Thedisplay screendoes Adjusts the brightness of the display screen not show anything Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service 9 Troubleshooting 233 Solving other problems Condition Paper does not feed into the machine Suggested solutions e Remove any obstructions from inside the machine e Paper has not been loaded correctly Remove paper from the tray and reload it correctly e Thereis too much paper in the tray Remove excess paper from the tray e The paper is too thick Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine see Print media specifications on page 267 If an original does not feed into the machine the DSDF rubber pad may require to be replaced Contact a service representative The paper keeps jamming e Thereis too much paper in the t
87. 35x Series Insert the LSU window cleaning stick back into its place X422x series X425x series X430x series only K If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate 9 Troubleshooting 200 Replacing the waste toner container When the life of the waste toner container expires totally the display screen shows the error message of replacing waste toner container At this stage the waste toner container needs to be replaced 1 Check the type of the waste toner container for your machine see Consumables and accessories on page 249 Open the front door X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 3 4 Push the left right locking levers and push outward as shown below Then remove the waste toner container X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Remove the new waste toner container from its package Insert the new waste toner container until it locks in place X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 9 Troubleshooting 201 Replacing the waste toner container 5 Close the front door Ensure that the door is securely closed X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 2 If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate 9 Troubles
88. 425x K430x K435x K40x series Open the front door X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 9 Troubleshooting 194 Replacing the toner cartridge 3 Remove the new toner cartridges from its bag 2 If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric 6 Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine Insert it back into its slot until locks in place X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 4 Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner evenly inside the cartridge X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 5 Carefully pull the sealing tape out of the toner cartridge K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 9 Troubleshooting 195 Replacing the toner cartridge 7 Close the front door Ensure that the door is securely closed X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 2 If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate 9 Troubleshooting 196 Replacing the imaging unit The machine uses four colors and has a diff
89. 6 Multi purpose tray 12 Paper output tray 1 Introduction 118 Machine overview Inner view X422x series X425x series X430x series N e a 1 LSU window cleaning stick 3 Toner Cartridges 2 Waste toner container 4 Imaging units 1 Scanner glass 4 Multi purpose tra 3 PA WA If you want to see the imaging unit you need to remove the waste toner 2 White sheet 5 USB port container 3 Multi purpose tray paper width guide 1 Introduction 19 Machine overview Inner view K425x series K430x series K435x series 5 o 6 1 oh Paa He 4 o CAT 1 2 8 1 Waste toner container 3 Imaging unit 2 Toner cartridge 1 Output support tray 5 Network port f 2 Control board cover 6 FDI Optional cover WA If you want to see the imaging unit you need to remove the waste toner container 3 USB port 7 Fax1 Optional port cover 4 USB printer port 8 Fax2 Optional port cover 1 Introduction EJ Control panel Control Panel 20 CT 14 Display screen Shows the current machine status and prompts during an operation You can set menus easily using the display screen 2 Motion sensor hole Motion sensor 3 a PowerLED Shows the power status of your machine b Power Wakeup button Turn the power on or off When the blue LE
90. 68 Opening printing preferences Listed items help you choose pre defined settings Basic tab to set various printing options 4 The screenshot may differ depending on model Orientation This option allows you to select the direction in which information is printed on rooms Ba Paper Graphics Finishing Advanced Eco Samsung a page Preview 4 Details a 6 no This favorite enables you to print with last used settings 210 x 297 mm inch Normal Printing a s This favorite enables you to print with all factory default Layout Options settings ng Eco Preview Printing a paper by adjusting pini options s Sno SOY This option allows you to select various ways to layout your document BN Double Sided Printing 1 double sides ofa sheet a printing on Single Page Per Side This option is a basic layout option This option allows add Se es to save paper by printing 2 you to print a page on one side of a Paper page e side of a sheet A 1 paki a outa documentan Multiple Pages Per Side See Printing multiple pages on one sheet of Secure Printing paper on page This favorite enables you to print as confidential in print mA MAA Poster Printing See Printing posters on page 77 Je ete lt lt Ga Gere e Booklet Printing See Printing booklets on page 77 e Page Border This option a
91. 68 297 302 143 173 309 310 310 309 310 310 305 166 296 authority 170 B booklet printing 77 booklets 77 C certificate 170 checking stored document 346 cleaning imaging unit area 349 352 347 LSU window 355 outside 347 scan unit 357 toner area 348 waste toner bottle area 354 cleaning a machine 347 connect printer cable 22 control panel 21 convention 12 copy setting 168 copying basic copying 108 121 understanding the copy screen 99 113 132 149 customer support 317 D default paper selection printing 309 default settings setting a fax header 141 deleting address book 153 demo page 360 device options 256 direct printing utility 84 display screen 21 displaying IP address 322 divice options 89 document box understanding the document box screen 188 document feeder driver installation 45 327 Index 381 Index Unix 332 duplex printing print 78 E easy document creator 123 175 e book conversion 175 editing group address 153 individual address 152 error correction mode 146 error message 224 ethernet 321 external authentication server 170 F favorites settings for printing 74 fax address book 168 clearing stored documents 346 forward 147 prefix dial 146 147 secure receive 147 toll save 146 147 fax receiving changing the receive mode in answering machine fax secure receiving fax sending delay sending resending automatically sending a fax fax e
92. 9 user 170 managing USB memory 262 margin printing 309 memory clearing memory 346 moving 359 multi purpose tray loading 53 tips on using 53 using special media 57 N network authentication 305 driver installation Linux 331 Mac 330 UNIX 332 Windows 327 installing environment 274 319 setting up 319 network filtering 326 N up printing Macintosh 92 Windows 76 Index O optional tray loading paper 48 ordering 254 original document clearing jam 203 loading in the document feeder 45 on the scanner glass 44 overlay printing create 82 delete 83 print 83 P paper size 62 paper type 62 poster print 77 postScript driver troubleshooting 248 power save 300 301 print mobile OS 335 print media card stock 60 envelope 58 glossy 61 47 labels 59 60 output support 267 paper tab in printer preferences 70 special media 57 printer preferences Linux 95 printer properties opening printer preferences 68 printer status general information 179 printing changing the default print settings 86 79 duplex 168 309 fitting your document to a selected paper size 79 Linux 94 Macintosh 92 margin 168 309 Macintosh 92 Windows 76 network printing 324 paper orientation 168 309 77 Windows 66 Macintosh 93 Windows 78 91 UNIX 96 using direct printing utility 84 82 80 printing a document Linux 94 Macintosh 92 UNIX 96 problem operating system problems 245 problems c
93. 9 600 x 600 dpi K425x series K430x series K435x series Fast on demand printing K435x series For single side printing up to 35 ppm A4 or Letter K430x series For single side printing up to 30ppm A4 or Letter K425x series Forsingle side printing up to 25 ppm A4 or Letter Key benefits Convenience You can print on the go from your smartphone or computer using Google Cloud Print enabled apps see Google Cloud Print on page 338 Easy Capture Manager allows you to easily edit and print whatever you captured using the Print Screen key on the keyboard see Easy Capture Manager on page 172 Samsung Easy Printer Manager and Printing Status is a program that monitors and informs you of the machine s status and allows you to customize the machine s settings see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 179 or Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager on page 176 Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax see Using Samsung Easy Document Creator on page 175 AnyWeb Print helps you screen capture preview scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more easily than when you use the ordinary program see Samsung AnyWeb Print on page 173 Smart Update allows you to check for the latest software and install the latest version during
94. A4 for the requested paper e Paper Size Allows you to change the paper size You can change the paper list on the display screen The paper lists are 2 When the paper is substituted some image loss may occur divided into the available A B type and letter type paper in this machine y 2 Media and tray CI Tray Settings e Tray Confirmation Message When you load paper into a tray you can set the confirmation message to appear automatically This machine can detect some paper sizes and types automatically If you want to set the paper size and type or the machine cannot detect them you can set the size and type directly in the confirmation window Tray Protection If you set tray 1 to On for example then tray 1 is excluded during tray switching KA This setting works for copy or print jobs It doesn t affect fax jobs Tray Priority Settings You can set the tray priority If first setting is tray 1 the machine automatically prints from tray 1 after the second setting tray runs out of paper 2 Media and tray 63 3 Printing This chapter explains common printing tasks Basic printing Opening printing preferences Setting Device Options Using special print features Using Direct Printing Utility Changing the default print settings Setting your machine as a default machine Print Settings in Machine Setting Device Options Printing to a file PRN Mac printing Linux printing UNIX printing Pr
95. Acrobat Reader Refer to the Mac User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Mac error messages 9 Troubleshooting ga Solving other problems Common Linux problems Condition There is no xsane nor simple scan application on my Linux machine Suggested solutions For some Linux distributions there might be no default scan application To use scan features install one of scan applications using download center supplied by the OS ex Ubuntu Software Center for Ubuntu Install Remove Software for openSUSE Software for Fedora Condition Printing always works with duplex Suggested solutions This duplex issue was in Ubuntu 9 10 CUPS package Update CUPS version to 1 4 1 5ubuntu2 2 Scanner can not be found via network For some Linux distributions strong firewall is enabled and it may block our installer from opening the necessary port for searching network devices In such a case open the snmp port 22161 manually or disable the firewall temporarily while using the device Printer is not added through system s printing utility The problem occurs on Debian 7 due to the defect in system config printer package of the Debian 7 http bugs debian org cgi bin bugreport cgi bug 662813 in Debian bug tracking system Please use another way to add printer CUPS WebUI for example When printing more than one copy the second copy does not print The problem
96. CD brightness Quick Launch You can select the register at Quick Launch Screen Capture Applications Search Job Status You can management the all application storage and shows all storage informations WA If the machine s power is cut off you need to reset the correct time and date once the power has been restored You can choose the altitude of the place where your machine is located You can also adjustment the image management and checking the machine test Altitude Adjustment You can choose the altitude of the place where your machine is located The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure which is determined by the height of the machine above sea level Therefore it is important to set the right altitude Normal 0 1 000 m 3 280 ft High 1 1 000 m 3 280 ft 2 000 m 6 561 ft High 2 2 000 m 6 561 ft 3 000 m 9 842 ft High 3 3 000 m 9 842 ft 4 000 m 13 123 ft High 4 4 000 m 13 123 ft 5 000 m 16 404 ft Humidity Optimizes print quality according to the humidity in the environment Custom Color Allows you to adjust the level of print density and copy darkness 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 300 Machine Tone Adjustment Allows you to automatically adjust the color tone to Performance Optimization produce the best possible print quality Auto Tone Adjustment Activation Instructs the machine to When this option is On you can wake up the m
97. Copy Image Shift and Poster Copy menus are disabled Both Pages From Right Prints both facing pages from a right page Off Disables this feature Book Center amp Edge Erase Erases shadows caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies Auto Repeat The number of images is automatically determined by the original image and paper size The number of repeating images is automatically selected based on size of the original the size of output page and the reduce enlarge percentage by up to 100 9h Duplex You can using duplex function and setting them Manual Repeat Manually select the number of images from 2 4 6 8 9 or 16 4 Copying 105 Understanding the copy screen s4 Watermark The watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading Draft or Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of a document TI Stamp 2 You cannot apply stamps to booklets or posters Prints the IP Address ID Device Information Comment Page Number or Date amp Time on printouts You can set the Text Size Opacity or Position of the stamp Ol Overlay An overlay is text and or images stored on a computer hard drive HDD ina special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays can take the place of traditional letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead
98. Current Job tab from the display screen 3 Select the job s you want to erase than press Delete If you want to erase all the jobs press Delete All To erase only fax jobs on the list select fax jobs with in the Job Type list and click Delete 4 Maintenance go Cleaning the machine If printing quality problems occur or if you use your machine in a dusty environment you need to clean your machine regularly to keep the best printing condition and use your machine longer A Read the following precautions before cleaning the machine any damages due to user s mis handling is not covered by the warranty e Turn the machine s power off and unplug all the power cords Do not disassemble the machine without following the instructions in this guide Donotclean the machine with cleaning materials containing large amounts of alcohol solvent or other strong substances They can discolor or distort the cabinet Do not use a vacuum cleaner to clean the toner dust we recommend you use a cloth or tissue dampened with water to clean it If you use a vacuum cleaner toner blows into the air and might be harmful to you e When using a dampened cloth be careful not to drip any water into the machine it might cause an electric shock e For more safety issues refer to the safety information chapter in the User s Guide Cleaning the outside Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint free cloth Dampen the cloth slightly wit
99. D is on the machine is powered on and you can use it If you turn the machine off press this button for more than two seconds Then confirmation window appears Shows the status of your machine see Understanding the LEDs on page 25 When you use the display screen use your finger only The screen may be damaged with a sharp pen or anything else 1 Introduction lan Connecting a network cable This machine has a bulit in network interface card You can connect your machine to a network using a network cable 1 Introduction 22 Turning on the machine 2 Plug the other end into a properly grounded AC outlet A Keep in mind that you should use the power cord supplied with the machine Otherwise it can cause damage or fire to the machine 1 Plug the power cord into the power receptacle 1 Introduction 23 Turning on the machine 3 Turn on the main power switch A You can also turn the machine on pressing the Power Wakeup e Some parts inside of the machine may be hot when power is on or after printing Be careful not to burn yourself when working inside the machine e Do not disassemble the machine when it is turned on or plugged in Doing so may give you an electric shock 1 Introduction 24 Understanding the LEDs Understanding the status LED The color of the status LED indicates the machine s current status
100. DF is a proprietary file format developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a device independent and resolution independent format PostScript PostScript PS is a page description language and programming language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas that is run in an interpreter to generate an image Printer Driver A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer to the printer Print Media The media like paper envelopes labels and transparencies which can be used in a printer a scanner a fax or a copier PPM Pages Per Minute PPM is a method of measurement for determining how fast a printer works meaning the number of pages a printer can produce in one minute An interface for a device driver this allows software to interact with the device driver using standard input output system calls which simplifies many tasks Protocol A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection communication and data transfer between two computing endpoints PS See PostScript PSTN The Public Switched Telephone Network PSTN is the network of the world s public circuit switched telephone networks which on industrial premises is usually routed through the switchboard RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS is a protocol for remote user authentication and accounting RADIUS enables ce
101. Example Bold For texts on the display or button names on the machine Start Note Provides additional information or detailed specification of the machine function and feature KA The date format may differ from country to country Caution Gives users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical damage or malfunction A Do not touch the surface of the drum located in the toner cartridge or imaging unit Footnote Provides additional information on certain words or a phrase a pages per minute Cross reference Guides users to a reference page for the additional detailed information See Glossary on page 369 1 About this administrator s guide 290 Intended audience The expected user for this guide is an administrator with an understanding of General knowledge of machine and other optional parts Basic technical knowledge The network printing environment Network protocols subnets security features addresses Windows operating systems on server and client computers 1 About this administrator s guide 291 Security policies for administrators Administrators need to adhere to the following policies in order to securely manage the machine The administrator should place the machine in a secure place where the machine can be protected by the physical contact or modulation The administrator should be fully aware of the security policies the organization has and follow them to manage the machine
102. I Using special print features Using overlay This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver Whatis an overlay An overlay is text and or images stored on the computer hard drive HDD as a special file format that can be printed on any document Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper Rather than using preprinted letterhead you can create an overlay containing exactly the same information that is currently on your letterhead To print a letter with your company s letterhead you do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the machine just print the letterhead overlay on your document Creating a new page overlay To use a page overlay you must create a new page overlay containing your logo or image a Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a new page overlay Position the items exactly as you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay To save the document as an overlay access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Click the Advanced tab and select Create from the Overlay drop down list In the Save As window type a name up to eight characters in the File name box Select the destination path if necessary The default is C Formover Click Save Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window When a confirming message window appears click Yes The file is not printed Instead it is st
103. IPv4 address is used elsewhere wieless LAN Check the IPv4 address or obtain a new IP address The IPv6 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system Check it The IPv6 address is used elsewhere wieless LAN Check the IPv6 address or obtain a new IP address TR Failure error number Install transfer roller again The transfer roller is not installed Install the transfer roller If it is already installed try to reinstall the transfer roller If the problem persists call for service Tray failure error number Check Tray connection The tray is not securely connected Reinstall the tray If the problem persists call for service The room temperature is not suitable for this set use Please adjust room temperature The machine is ina room with improper room temperature Please adjust room temperature see Adjustment on page 300 This IP address conflicts with that of other system Check it The IP address is used elsewhere Check the IP address or obtain a new IP address Tray failure error number Pull tray number out and insert it Call for service if the problem persists The tray is not securely connected Reinstall the tray If the problem persists call for service tray number is not installed Install the tray The tray is not properly installed Reinstall the tray If the problem persis
104. K After the uninstallation is finished click Close If a machine has already been added delete it from the Print Setup Utility or Print amp Fax Open Terminal program Move to uld folder extracted from Unified Linux Driver package Execute uninstall sh command If you re not logged in as root execute the command with sudo as sudo uninstall sh Proceed with uninstallation 1 Introduction CI 2 Media and tray This chapter provides information on how to load originals and print media into your machine Loading originals Selecting print media Loading paper in the tray Printing on special media Tray Settings Loading originals You can use the scanner glass or the Dual scan document feeder DSDF to load 1 Open the DSDF an original for copying scanning and sending a fax On the scanner glass Make sure that no originals are in the DSDF If an original is detected in the DSDF the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass To get the best scan quality especially for colored or gray scaled images use the scanner glass Preparing originals Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the Do not load paper smaller than 25 x 25 mm 1 0x 1 0 inch or larger than 297 registration guide at the top left corner of the glass x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 inches Make sure any glue ink or correction fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading 2
105. K e Make sure your machine supports the UNIX operating system before installing the UNIX printer driver see Operating System on page 8 e The commands are marked with when typing the commands do not CA giide t your UNIK OS fordetailk type ie d Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country see Operating System on page 8 4 Unpack the UNIX printer driver package For example on IBM AIX use the following commands To use the UNIX printer driver you have to install the UNIX printer driver gzip d lt enter the package name tar xf package first then setup the printer You can download the UNIX printer driver package from the Samsung website http www samsung com gt find your 5 the unpacked directory product gt Support or Downloads 6 Run the install script install i install is the installer script file which is used to install or uninstall the UNIX Printer Driver package Use chmod 755 install command to give the permission to the installer script 3 Network setup 332 Installing driver over the network 7 Execute the install c command to verify installation results Setting up the printer 8 Run installprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window referring to the following procedures To add the printer to your UNIX system run i
106. Media and tray Loading originals 3 Close the DSDF In the dual scan document feeder DSDF Preparing originals Leaving the DADF open while copying may affect copy quality and toner consumption Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout Always keep it clean e Donotload paper smaller than 140 x 140 mm 5 5 x 5 5 inches or larger than e If you are copying a page from a book or magazine lift the DSDF until its 297 x 432 mm 11 7 x 17 inches hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 inch start copying with the lid open e The DSDF can automatically detect A3 A4 LEF A4 SEF B4 B5 LEF B5 SEF A5 LEF A5 SEF Ledger Legal Letter LEF Letter SEF Statement LEF and Statement SEF sized originals A e Be careful not to break the scanner glass You may get hurt e Do not attempt to load the following types of paper in order to prevent Donot put hands on the scanner glass while closing the DSDF The DSDF paper jams low print quality and machine damage may fall on your hands and cause injury Carbon paper or carbon backed paper e Do not look at the light inside of the scanner while copying or scanning It is harmful to eyes Coated paper Onion skin or thin paper Wrinkled or creased paper Curled or rolled paper Torn paper Remove all staples and paper clips before loading Make sure any glue ink or c
107. Printing Preferences may be incorrect For many software applications the paper source selection is found under the Paper tab within the Printing Preferences Select the correct paper source See the printer driver help screen see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Aprintjobis The job may be very Reduce the complexity of the page extremely complex or try adjusting the print quality slow settings Half the page The page orientation Change the page orientation in is blank setting may be incorrect your application See the printer driver help screen The paper size and the paper size settings do not match Ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paperin the tray Or ensure that the paper size in the printer driver settings matches the paper selection in the software application settings you use 9 Troubleshooting 235 Solving other problems Condition The machine prints but the text is wrong garbled or incomplete Possible cause The machine cable is loose or defective Suggested solutions Disconnect the machine cable and reconnect Try a print job that you have already printed successfully If possible attach the cable and the machine to another computer that you know works and try a print job Finally try a new machine cable The wrong printer driver was selected Check the application s printe
108. Pv6 and MAC addresses IPv4Filtering You can enable disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see Network filtering settings on page 326 1Pv6 Filtering You can enable disable IPv6 filtering as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see Network filtering settings on page 326 MAC Filtering You can enable disable Mac filtering as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see Network filtering settings on page 326 802 1x You can enable disable 802 1x Security as well as manage filtering rules This feature is also available from the machine see 802 1x on page 315 External Authentication Server Set the servers for authentication 802 1x You can enable 802 1x authentication which is a port based authentication If this authentication is enabled the machine is not allowed to access through the protected side of the network until the machine is authorized Use this feature to protect your network This feature is also available from the machine see 802 1x on page 315 User Access Control You can restrict users from accessing the machine or application You can also give specific permission for user to only use certain feature of the machine For example you can allow user A to only use print feature In this case user A will not be able to scan copy or fax with t
109. S MACHINE TO PRODUCE AND THEN USE COUNTERFEIT CURRENCY YOU WILL BE PUNISHED TO THE FULLEST EXTENT OF THE LAW REV 0 90 11 Appendix 285 User s Guide Samsung Multifunction Multi Xpress X422x X425x X430x X40x series K425x K430x K435x K40x series ADVANCED ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE This administrator s guide provides advanced information for administrator s to use and manage the machine Some features may not be available depending on model or country BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation basic operation and troubleshooting on Windows ADVANCED ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE 1 About this administrator s guide Convention 290 Intended audience 291 Security policies for administrators 292 Terminology used in this guide 293 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu Log in 296 Language and Input 297 Machine 298 Admin Settings 303 Management 311 Network Settings 313 System 317 Network environment Accessing network setup Network settings configuring TCP IP Print settings Ports to set for network printing Set Protocols Network filtering settings Installing driver over the network Samsung Mobile Print AirPrint Google Cloud Print 4 Maintenance Monitoring the supplies life Setting supplies reorder notification Replacing amp redistributing supplies Finding the serial number Clearing memory Cleaning the machine 319 320 321 324 325 326 327 335 336 338 342
110. SB Drive device see Printing to a file PRN on page 91 TIFF TIFF 6 0 Baseline JPEG JPEG Baseline PDF PDF 1 7 and below 9 In case of 8bit CMYK JPEG files Job could be cancelled A e Do not remove the USB Drive device while it is in use The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by a user s misuse e If your USB Drive device has certain features such as security settings and password settings your machine may not automatically detect it For details about these features see USB Drive device s User s Guide 10 Consumables and accessories 260 Using a USB Drive device To print a document from a USB Drive device 5 Select the appropriate option Copies Selects the number of copies 1 Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine Paper Source Select from which tray the paper is used Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on Auto fit All intj he selected i it see About USB Drive device on page 259 uto fit Allows you to scale your print job to the selected paper size in the tray regardless of the document size Select a tray and press On KA The machine cannot detect the unformatted USB Drive device Format and then reinsert the USB Drive device into the USB port on your 6 Tap icon to begin printing machine If the machine did not detect your USB Drive when the 7 After printing is completed you can remove the USB Drive device from
111. The administrator can record and manage the machine usage information by keeping the system log files The system log files are stored e Firmware Version You can check the firmware version used in the machine Check the version and update it if necessary This feature is also available on the machine s HDD hard disk drive and when it is full it will erase old data Export and save the important audit data separately using the exporting feature Log configuration You can enable or disable keeping logs You can from the machine see Machine Details on page 317 Application Management You can add or delete applications license If you add an application you need to activate the license of the installed application Some applications may not have a license This feature is also also backup log files by periods and transfer to a repository server available from the machine see Application Management on page 309 Log Viewer You can view delete and search log files e Backup Restore You can backup the machine s configurations and restore the configuration when there is a problem with the machine The saved backed up files can also be used to configure other machines Contact Information You can view contact information To change the information see Contact Information on page 317 e Link You can view links to useful websites where you can View product information and get support samsung website down
112. User s Guide Samsung Multifunction Multi Xpress X422x X425x X430x X40x series K425x K430x K435x K40x series BASIC This guide provides information concerning installation basic operation and troubleshooting on Windows ADVANCED ADMINISTRATOR S GUIDE This guide provides information about installation advanced configuration operation and troubleshooting onvarious OS environments Some features may not be available depending on models or countries Loading paper in the tray 48 1 Introduction Printing on special media 57 Tray Settings 62 Key benefits 6 Features by model 8 er Useful to know 11 About this users guide 12 Printer driver features 65 Safety information 13 Basic printing 66 Machine overview TE Opening printing preferences 68 controlpanel cl Using special print features 76 Connecting a neIWOrCcabie Using Direct Printing Utility 84 Turning om the machine Changing the default print settings 86 Understanding the LEDs Setting your machine asa default machine 87 Display screen and useful menu 28 Print Settings in Machine 88 Understanding the pop up keyboard 37 Setting Device Options 89 Installing the driver locally 38 Printing to a file PRN 91 Reinstalling the driver 41 Mac printing 92 Linux printing 94 UNIX printing 96 Loading originals 34 Selecting print media 47 Sending a fax 141 Receiving a fax 143 4 Copying Understanding the copy screen 99 Setti dd book Badea Pan 7 Setting up an a
113. WEDEN 0771 726 7864 SAMSUNG www samsung com se support 0800 726 78 64 0800 5AMSUNG www samsung com ch support German SWITZERLAND www samsung com ch_fr support French 18252273 www samsung com SYRIA levant support English TADJIKISTAN 8 10 800 500 55 500 www samsung com support TAIWAN 0800 329999 www samsung com tw support TANZANIA 0685 88 99 00 www samsung com support THAILAND 0 2689 3232 www samsung com 1800 29 3232 th support 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com latin support TRINIDAD amp Spanish NO BRS www samsung com latin_en support English TURKEY 4447711 www samsung com tr support TUNISIA 80 1000 12 www samsung com n_africa support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide ga Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Customer Care Center 8 10 800 500 55 500 WebSite www samsung com support 0 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ve support 1800 588 889 www samsung com vn support Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region 800 SAMSUNG 800 726 7864 ae UZBEKISTAN U A E www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic VENEZUELA UK 0330 SAMSUNG 7267864 www samsung com uk support VIETNAM U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com Consummer us support ZAMBIA Electonics U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG 72 6786 www samsung com Mobile Phones HHP 1 888 987 HELP 4357 us support UGANDA 0800 300 300 www samsung com support
114. achine from the power saving automatically calibrate the tone at certain intervals Activate this option mode with the following actions to perform a normal or full tone adjustment after a certain number or pages are printed or the machine is not used for a certain period e Pressing Power Wakeup on the control panel Auto Tone Adjustment Performs a normal or full tone adjustment e Loading paper in a tray sequence immediately f a y e Opening or closing the cover e Pulling a tray out or pushing a tray in Normal Automatically adjusts the color tone This process takes more time than Quick but it produces better results e Place the originals in the DSDF Full Changes the color table entirely to adjust the color tone e Plug in the USB Drive device Machine Test Allows you to adjust the tone level Low Power Save Print Adjustment Allows you to adjust the print area When images are rinted off the page or shifted adjust the print area p pad J p Low Power Save option allows your machine to save power When you are not using the machine for a while some parts of the machine automatically enter Low Power Save option Low Power Save option conserves less power than Power Saver Power Save option When you are not using the machine for a while use this option to save power Power Save 2 The Power Save option can be wake up by pressing the display screen When you are not using the
115. achine uses to print reports Initial Settings Allows you to set the basic settings needed to be set before using the machine see Initial settings administrator only on page 307 Fax Settings You can set the default fax options Set the most frequently used fax settings see Fax Settings on page 308 Application Management You can install or uninstall applications license If you add an application you need to activate the license of the installed application Some applications may not have a license see Application Management on page 309 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 303 Admin Settings Allows you to set up the security related settings Image Overwrite You can set the machine to overwrite data stored in the memory The machine overwrites the data with different patterns eliminating the possibilities of recovery This feature may not be available depending on models or option kits installed Automatic Image Overwrite When a job is completed there are temporal images left in the memory For security reasons you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non volatile memory If you want to secure memory space you can set the machine to automatically overwrite secure non volatile memory Manual Image Overwrite When printing copying scanning and faxing the machine temporarily uses memory space For security reasons you can set the machine to manually
116. age Darkness Sharpness Contrast and Negative Image Background Adjustment This option allows you to compensate for originals that contain color in the background such as newspapers or catalogs You can use the options in this menu to make the copies easier to read Background Density Allows you to adjust the density of the background in the scanned image This feature is useful when scanning originals that have turned yellow from age or originals with a dark background Backside Image Allows you to erase any text or images that show through from the other side of the original You can use this feature to ensure that your scanned output is clearly legible Ak Mirror Image This option allows you to reverse the original document like a mirror 4 Copying Basic copy This is the usual procedure to copy your original documents 1 Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps 2 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 44 3 Adjust the settings on the Copy tab and More tab 4 Enter the number of copies desired on the numeric keypad or button on the control panel if necessary 5 Start BA Start from the control panel to begin Ha eg 2 To cancel the current copy job tap Stop gt tap Job Status on the control panel Then delete the job you want see Job Status on page 33 4 Copying 108 Using the
117. age menu on page 36 This setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type for the current scan job Original To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only on page 296 2Sided Book For originals that are printed on both sides 5 Scan amp Send Scanning Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen 2 Sided Calendar For originals that are printed on both sides but the back Fax Options is rotated 180 degrees If you send originals that are of poor quality or contain photographs you can adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax To use 2 Sided Book and 2 Sided Calendar load the originals on the DADF If the machine cannot detect the original on the DADF it automatically changes to 1 Sided Resolution ii Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time Fine Recommended for the originals containing small characters thin Scan Options lines or text from a dot matrix printer Super Fine Recommended for originals containing fine details This option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super File Name Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination Fine resolution Set file options of the scanned output File Format Select a file format for the scanned output Ultra Fine Recommended for or
118. agenta CLT Y808S Yellow Waste toner container Approx 64 000 pages a Declared yield value in accordance with 5 coverage WU Depending on the options and job mode used the toner cartridge s lifespan may differ CLT W808 When purchasing new toner cartridges or other supplies these must be purchased in the same country as the machine you are using Otherwise new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with your machine due to different configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the specific country conditions You must purchase Consumables including toner cartridges in the same country where you purchased your machine Otherwise Consumables will be incompatible with your machine since the system configuration of these vary from country to country 10 Consumables and accessories 252 Precautions e Disconnect the power cord Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories e Discharge static electricity The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any device plugged
119. al machine information to use in the network and set ethernet settings This feature is also available from the machine see Ethernet on page 321 TCP IPv4 TCP IPv6 Raw TCP IP LPR IPP Telnet WSD SLP UPNP mDNS CIFS SNMP SNMPv1 v2 SNMPv3 You can set protocol settings This feature is also available from the machine Outgoing Mail Server SMTP You can set server settings for outgoing emails If this setting is not configured you cannot use scan to email feature Outgoing emails will be sent through SMTP server you set here This feature is also available from the machine see Network Protocol on page 315 HTTP You can allow or block users from accessing the SyncThru Web Service This feature is also available from the machine see Network Protocol on page 315 Proxy You can set proxy settings and enable authentication to connect to licence server through http proxy server These proxy settings are provided currently only if the administrator wants to update an XOA application s license online through proxy server The security tab has System Security Network Security User Access Control and System Log You cannot access this tab if you do not log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 System Security From the SyncThru Web Service select the Security tab gt System Security System Administrator Enter the system administrator s information The machine sends email notification to the
120. alled Accessbility Allows you to configure the machine to make it easier to use In this menu you can change various sound interaction and display options so that the machine is more accessible to users Contact Information This feature allows you to view the service center s information and contact point where users can get help If you log in as an administrator you can change the contact information System Administrator Check the contact information of the administrator Samsung Support Check the information of the service center 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 3 Network setup This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the network environment before using the machine You can set up the network environment using the Network Setting menu under the Settings menu You need to be familiar with the terms used for setting up the network environment Refer to the glossary for terms you do not understand Glossary on page 369 Network environment Accessing network setup Network settings configuring TCP IP Print settings Ports to set for network printing Set Protocols Network filtering settings Installing driver over the network Samsung Mobile Print AirPrint Google Cloud Print Network environment You can use network after connecting network cable to a corresponding port on ak your machine Network protocols You need to set up the network protocols on the machi
121. ame you want to use then tap Next Keep in mind to enter the device name to be used on the network 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu Admin Settings If necessary enter the location of the machine in the Location field If necessary enter the information in the Administrator field for the person to contact when any problem occurs on the machine Verify Connections Tap the Test button to verify the Ethernet Card connection When Connected appears after tap the Test button press Next If Not connected appears make sure that the machine is connected to the network then verify the LAN connection again dh If a network connection problem persists contact your network administrator If you installed an optional fax kit or finisher press each Test button for verify connection of them Network Settings Enter the IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Host Name Domain Name Primary DNS Server and Secondary DNS Server in each field Then tap Next WA A Ifa new IP address is assigned automatically by a DHCP or BOOTP press DHCP or BOOTP If you are not sure about your network environment contact your network administrator SNMP Configuration Enter the Community Name Access Permission Authentication User Name Authentication Password Authentication Confirm Password Privacy Password and Privacy Confirm Password in each field Then tap Done You can set the default fax options Set th
122. amsung Printers and run Samsung Easy Document Creator Text Converting Use to scan documents that need to be saved in an editable text format Click Scan from the home screen Book Scanning Use to scan books with the flatbed scanner Select the type of scanning or a favorites then click Start SNS Upload Use to quickly and easily upload scanned images or existing images to a variety of social networking sites SNS Make adjustments to the image Scan Settings and More Options E Book Conversion Use to scan multiple documents together as one e Click Scan to scan a final image or Prescan to get another preview book or combine existing files into an e book O N A UU AWN Select Save to Location Send to Email or Send to SNS 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 123 Plug in Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 9 Click Save to save the scanned image Send to email the scanned image or Share to upload the scanned image K If there is room on the scanning glass you can scan more than one item at atime Use the tool to define multiple selection areas 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 124 Mac scanning Scanning from USB connected machine 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page
123. an set your machine to prevent unlisted IP or MAC addresses from connecting to the machine You can set general network filtering settings Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Network Security gt Network Filtering from the home screen or App K You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 168 MAC Filtering Disable MAC filtering IPv4 Filtering Disable IPv4 filtering IPv6 Filtering Disable IPv6 filtering 3 Network setup 326 Installing driver over the network You must install the printer driver software for printing The software includes e For Windows 8 drivers applications and other support programs If the installation window does not appear from Charms select Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Setup exe replacing X with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed All applications should be closed on your computer before beginning installation If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window appears click the window and select Run Setup exe Cy tahan accept ine nsitationagreementsin tne staan window Then click Next 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set 4 Sel
124. and paper Tips for moving the machine Printing a demo page Monitoring the supplies life Check remaining life of the supplies and prepare the supplies in advance From the SyncThru Web Service You can also print the supplies life report Select Supplies Information in the Report feature see Report on page 311 Information tab on page 167 From the machine 1 Tap Settings gt Management gt Supplies Life from the main screen e 1 From the SyncThru Web Service select the Information tab gt Supplies Check the remaining percentage N We recommend you prepare new supplies if the remaining percentage is less than 10 see Replacing amp redistributing supplies on page 344 Check the consumables life N We recommend you prepare new supplies or those that you have used over 90 of their average yield see Replacing amp redistributing supplies on page 344 4 Maintenance ga Setting supplies reorder notification Set the supplies reorder notification to receive notification emails and prepare supplies in advance See Supplies Management on page 306 4 Maintenance 343 Replacing amp redistributing supplies Replacing the toner cartridge When the toner cartridge is totally empty The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message of replacing toner The machine stops printing and incoming faxes are saved in memory However
125. ap Add Contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want When editing a contact tap a field to change or delete the information or add include in the group Tap Done when you are finished additional fields to the contact s information To search fora contact tap the search field in the Add Contact screen Tap Address book gt Contacts on the home screen or Apps Enter the first few letters of a contact s name or tap the Q search icon to show all contacts In the list that appears check the boxes for the contacts KU If you want to delete an individual address check the box of that address 4 Tap Done to save the information and tap nia Sub menu Action overflow 5 Delete Contacts 3 Tap the input field for the information you want to change The pop up keyboard appears allowing you to type in the field 4 Tap Done to save the information 7 Setting up an address book 152 Using the control panel Editing address groups 1 2 Tap Address book gt Groups on the home screen or Apps Tap the name of group you want to edit and tap WA edit If you want to delete an address group check the box for the group you want to delete and tap delete Tap the group name input field to change the name of the group Tap Add contact and check the boxes for any addresses you want include in the group Tap Done when you are finished To search for a contact tap the s
126. applicable to your machine e Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and There are two power saving modes see then click on any option you want to know about Power Saver on page 301 Timers Allows you to set the time for machine to return to the default setting or cancel the held job if there is no input for an extended time see Timers administrator only on page Tap Settings gt Machine from the home screen or Apps Feature Description 302 Tray Settings Allows you to adjust the current tray settings Eco Allows you to set the Eco mode as a default such as the paper type and tray priorities see and change settings for Eco mode Using Eco Tray settings on page 299 mode can save printing resources see ECO on page 302 Sound Allows you to set the volume for button sound notice alarm and sounds occurring a Available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected see i i Authentication on page 305 during fax job You can test the volume right after you set the level see Sound on page 299 Display Allows you to set the wallpaper brightness and quick launch Storage Management all application s storage Adjustment Allows you to adjust altitude huminity image and macine test functions 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 298 Machine Ca Sound This feature allows you to check the current tray settings and change th
127. axes are printed Stamp Received Name Print the received fax information on printouts Paper Source Select a tray as the paper source Forwarding faxes You can set your machine to forward sent or received faxes to email SMB FTP etc If you are out of the office but need to receive faxes this feature may be useful You can set the default fax options Set the most frequently used fax settings Tap Settings gt Fax Settings on the display screen WA P Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Click the v Help from the home screen or quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open a web browser from a networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt Fax see Settings tab on page 168 Option Description Machine ID amp Fax No You can set the machine ID and fax number to be printed at the top of each page 6 Scan amp Send Faxing ga Receiving a fax Option Redial Description Set the machine to re dial the fax number if the recipient s fax line is busy or not answered Set the number of re dial attempts and the interval between attempts e Redial Term Select terms for re dialing using the up down arrows e Redial Times Select
128. ay Face down Face up Preprinted paper must be printed with heat resistant ink that will not melt vaporize or release hazardous emissions when subjected to the machine s fusing temperature of about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second Preprinted paper ink must be non flammable and should not adversely affect machine rollers Forms should be sealed in a moisture proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage Before you load preprinted paper verify that the ink on the paper is dry During the fusing process wet ink can come off preprinted paper reducing print quality 2 Media and tray 60 Printing on special media KU Load a single sheet of paper into the multi purpose tray at a time glossy side facing down Recommend media Glossy paper Letter for this machine by HP Brochure Paper Product 06611A only Recommend media Glossy paper A4 for this machine by HP Superior Paper 160 glossy Product 06616A only 2 Media and tray CI Tray Settings To change detailed tray settings tap Settings 5 Tray Settings and select the If there is no required size paper or you need to use custom sized paper tray and options you want on the display screen press the cardinal point arrows to set the paper size You can also set and save the custom size using Custom Size You can select the custom size a 10 66 whenever you need it O Settings ___ Paper Type Allows you to change the paper type i
129. bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of the transmission the following information 1 the date and time of transmission 2 identification of either business business entity or individual sending the message and 3 telephone number of either the sending machine business business entity or individual 11 Appendix 280 Regulatory information The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68 If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities or require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment or otherwise materially affect its use or performance the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service Ringer Equivalence Number The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the machine In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line and is useful for determining whether you have overloaded the line Installing seve
130. by Apple Inc for computer networking It was included in the original Mac 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking BIT Depth A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image Higher color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors As the number of bits increases the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for a color map 1 bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and white BMP A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows graphics subsystem GDI and used commonly as a simple graphics file format on that platform Glossary 369 Glossary BOOTP Coverage Bootstrap Protocol A network protocol used by a network client to obtain its IP address automatically This is usually done in the bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on them The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each client BOOTP enables diskless workstation computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced operating system CCD Charge Coupled Device CCD is a hardware which enables the scan job CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to prevent any damage when you move the machine Collation It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing For example 5 coverage means that an A4 sided pa
131. cable is disconnected Check it The machine is not connected with a network cable Connect the machine to the network with a network cable 9 Troubleshooting 226 j Understanding display messages Message Original paper jam in the exit area of scanner Meaning The originals are jammed in Dual scan document feeder Suggested solutions Clear the jam Message Paper is low in tray number Load paper Meaning Running out of paper in the tray Suggested solutions Load paper in the tray Original paper jam inside of the scanner The originals are jammed in Dual scan document feeder Clear the jam see Original paper jam inside of scanner on page 205 or Paper Jam at the bottom Paper has jammed Clear the jam see Paper Original paper jam inside the scanner The originals are jammed in Dual scan document feeder Clear the jam see Original paper jam inside of scanner on page 205 or of duplex path during duplex printing jam bottom of duplex path Jam Duplex Regi on page 221 Paper Jam at the top of Paper has jammed Clear the jam see Paper duplex path during duplex printing jam at the top of duplex path Jam Duplex Return Jam Duplex 1 on page 219 Paper in all output bins is full Remove printed paper The output tray is full Remove papers from the output tray the machine resumes printing Paper in output bin
132. can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the need to activate the license of the installed application Some applications may Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of not have a license your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Settings tab Tap Seitiigss Applicaton Mahaigement ron the homesersen or Apps gt Machine Settings gt Printer see Settings tab on page 168 i 9 e You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of our machine When SyncThru W rvi ns click th Mairitenan e tab Paa Ba e eee tab on page 171 You can store documents print download and sent from computers or scanned Some models may not support this feature images in the Box The Box is located on your machine s hard disk drive HDD It means the documents are stored on the HDD You can create a password for a certain Stored Document so unauthorized users cannot access it Also you can print stored documents by using a variety of printing features and send the documents to several destination such as email server or fax You can set a Stored Document and use Stored Document feature with SyncThru Web Service 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 309 Admin Settings Installing an application Uninstalling an application 1 Tap Install button 1 Select the application you want to uninstall an
133. can choose the method for allocating IP addresses Static Select to enter IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address manually BOOTP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address are automatically allocated by the BOOTP Server DHCP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address are automatically allocated by the DHCP Server 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu gg Network Settings DNS Configuration You can configure the DNS server Host Name Enter the host name You can enter up to 63 characters Default name is SEC MAC address Domain Name Enter the domain name You can enter up to 128 characters Primary DNS Server Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use primarily Secondary DNS Server Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use as an alternative Dynamic DNS Registration If you want to use check the checkbox es of dynamic DNS registration If this option is checked the machine registers its host name and domain name to configured DNS servers dynamically Also if this option is checked and DHCP is selected DHCP FODN options are automatically disabled WINS You can configure the WINS server WINS is used in the Windows operating system Select this option Display IP Address You can set the machine to display the IP address on the Notification Bar If you select this option the IP address will show on the Notification Bar TCP IPv6 You can set the IPv6 settings Protocol Tap to us
134. change the necessary settings needed for using the network Security Information Shows the current security settings of the machine and network 8 Management tools SyncThru Web Service You can manage the Box This feature is also available from the machine see Using Box on page 188 Forward Print Send Download You can manage the folder and files in Forward Print Send Download Add You can create Box in Print Send Download tab and Secured Box in Print Send tab Delete You can delete Box and file in Forward Print Send Download tab Edit You can edit Box and file name in Print Send Download tab Browse If you want to browse the Box check the Box you want then click Browse Task You can copy and move the Box and files in Print Send Download tab Address book tab You can manage the address book This feature is also available from the machine see Understanding the address screen on page 149 Individual You can manage individual entries in the address book Group You can manage group address books Settings tab has sub menus Machine Settings and Network Settings You cannot view or access this tab if you do not log in as an administrator see Logging into SyncThru Web Service on page 166 Machine Settings You can set machine settings System You can set machine related settings Printer You can set print related settings such as darkness or adjust the
135. creen Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter see Understanding display messages on page 224 If the problem persists call for service 1 Introduction 26 Understanding the LEDs The color of the status LED indicates the machine s current status Status Description Off The machine is off line Blue On The machine is on line and can be used Blinking The machine is in power save mode When data is received or any screen is pressed it switches to on line automatically Check the message on the display screen Follow the instructions in the message or refer to the troubleshooting chapter see Understanding display messages on page 224 If the problem persists call for service 1 Introduction Display screen and useful menu Menu navigation You can tailor the machine s range of functions to fit your needs with both menus and widgets Access features by scrolling through the available on screen menus Manual terms Tap Lightly touch the screen and release your finger For example Tap the on screen keyboard to enter characters or other text Tap a menu item to select it Tap an application s icon to launch the application Touch and hold Lightly touch and hold your finger to the screen For example Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it Touch and hold on a field to display a pop up menu of options Swipe Lightly drag your fin
136. ctX 9 graphics with 128 MB memory to enable the Aero theme e DVD R W Drive Windows Server 2012 Intel Pentium IV 1 4 GHz x64 processors 2 GHz or faster 512 MB 2 GB 32 GB Windows Server 2012 R2 11 Appendix Specifications Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all Windows operating systems e Users who have administrator rights can install the software e Windows Terminal Services is compatible with your machine Mac Requirements Recommended Operating system 2 CPU RAM Free HDD space Mac OS X 10 5 Intel processors 512 MB 1 GB 1 GB 867 MHz or faster Power PC G4 G5 Mac OS X 10 6 Intel processors 1 GB 2 GB 1 GB Mac OS X 10 7 10 9 Intel processors 2 GB 4 GB 11 Appendix Specifications Linux Items Operating system Requirements Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 6 Fedora 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 openSUSE 11 0 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 12 1 12 2 12 3 Ubuntu 10 04 10 10 11 04 11 10 12 04 12 10 13 04 SUSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10 11 Debian 5 0 6 0 7 0 7 1 Mint 13 14 15 CPU Pentium IV 2 4GHz Intel Core 2 RAM 512 MB 1 GB Free HDD space 1 GB 2 GB 11 Appendix Specifications Unix Items Operating system Requirements Sun Solaris 9 10 11 x86 SPARC HP UX 11 0 11i v1 11i v2 11i v3 PA RISC Itanium IBM AIX 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 6 1 7 1 PowerPC Fre
137. cument jams 8 Grasp the misfed paper and remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling it using both hands If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 9 Close the DSDF 9 Troubleshooting 208 Tips for avoiding paper jams By selecting the correct media types most paper jams can be avoided When a paper jam occurs refer to the next guidelines Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly see Loading paper in the tray on page 48 Do not overload the tray Ensure that the paper level is below the paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing Flex fan and straighten paper before loading Do not use creased damp or highly curled paper Do not mix paper types in a tray Use only recommended print media see Tray Settings on page 62 Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in the tray or facing down in the multi purpose tray 9 Troubleshooting 209 Clearing paper jams When a paper jam occurs a warning message appears on the display screen A To avoid tearing the paper pull the jammed paper out slowly and gently Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the jam Paper jam in tray 1 2 WA Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machin
138. d easy viewing on your mobile device Downloading Samsung Mobile Print To download Samsung Mobile Print go to the application store Samsung Apps Play Store App Store on your mobile device and just search for Samsung Mobile Print You can also visit iTunes for Apple devices on your computer Android 3 Network setup 335 AirPrint 4 Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain then click LOGIN Only AirPrint certified machines can use the AirPrint feature Check the box your machine came in for the AirPrint certified mark Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 296 5 When the SyncThru Web Service window opens click Settings gt AirPrint allows you to print directly from iPhone iPad and iPod touch Network Settings I running the latest version of iOS AirPrint Setting up AirPrint Bonjour mDNS and IPP protocols are required on your machine to use the AirPrint feature You can enable the AirPrint feature by one of the following methods 6 Click AirPrint 1 Check whether the machine is connected to the network 2 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer Safari or Firefox and enter your machine s new IP address in the browser window For example http 192 168 1 133 3 Click Login in the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website 3 Network setup 336 AirPrint Printing via AirPrint
139. d the machine can only be used by a user with an authorized ID and password on the machine Contact the machine s administrator Navigating the Home Screens The machine initially has seven home screens You can place application icons on any page From the main home screen swipe left or right The main home screen is located in the center and three additional pages are located on each side 1 Introduction 29 Display screen and useful menu Navigating the application menus By default this machine has several application menus available in the main home screen If you want to access all application menus and widgets tap the HE icon and swipe the screen left or right WU As you add applications the number of application menus available to you increases Accessing recently used apps You can easily find any app that you used recently Tap the SH icon from anywhere to open the recently used applications window 2 Tap an application s icon in this window to open it Customizing your home screen You can customize your home screen to suit your needs Creating shortcuts Shortcuts are different from widgets While widgets can only launch applications shortcuts can do this and activate features and actions Adding a shortcut from the home screen 1 Tapthe EEJ icon to go to the main home screen Touch and hold the home screen to view a list of available shortcuts to select from Set wallpaper
140. d your machine name in Print Using Click Add Click Continue After the installation is finished click Close You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set Copy Unified Linux Driver package to your system 2 3 Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the package to 4 Extract the package 5 Move to uld folder 6 Execute install sh command If you are not logged in as root execute the command with sudo as sudo install sh 7 Proceed with installation 8 When installation finished launch Printing utility Go to System gt Administration gt Printing or execute system config printer command in Terminal program 3 Network setup 331 Installing driver over the network Q Click Add button Installing the UNIX printer driver package 10 Select AppSocket HP JetDirect and enter your machine s IP address The installation procedure is common for all variants of UNIX OS mentioned 11 Click Forward button and add it to your system 1 From the Samsung website download and unpack the UNIX Printer Driver package to your computer a n su Copy the appropriate driver archive to the target UNIX computer W
141. d tap Uninstall 2 A pop up window with folder tree appears Select the application file 2 A confirmation window appears Press Yes and press OK The application you selected is uninstalled 3 A verification message appears Read the agreement and check I accept terms of the License Agreement and press OK Application installation begins Viewing an application in details 1 Tap the application name you want to view in details 2 View the application s information in details Enabling Disabling an application Select the application you want to enable disable and press Enable Disable The application you selected is enabled disabled 2 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu gg Management K e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or Report models If so it is not applicable to your machine e Click the Help from the home screen or quick menu and This feature allows you to print all the reports provided by your machine You then click on any option you want to know about can use these reports to help you maintain your machine You can checking the supplies life and printing report 9 You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Information gt Print information see Information tab on page 167 Supplies Life System Report
142. day and during the day as needed 1 2 Prepare a soft lint free cloth Open the scanner lid Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and the document feeder glass with the cloth until it is clean and dry 3 White sheet 4 Document feeder glass Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean and dry Close the scanner lid 4 Maintenance Tips for storing the machine supplies and paper Keep them in a cool place with no humidity Keep them covered so that dusts cannot be accumulated Keep them out of water When moving the machine do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or reduce print quality When moving the machine make sure at least two people are holding the machine securely Toner cartridge Imaging unit To get the best print quality from the toner cartridge keep the following guidelines in mind Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until it s ready to use Do not refill the toner cartridge The machine warranty does not cover damage caused by using a refilled cartridge Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine Keep it in a stable place so the toner dust is not slanted to one side Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it Place cartons on pallets or shelves not on the floor Do not place heavy object
143. ddress boo Using the ula Copy menu 193 Understanding the address screen 149 ID card copying nag Using the control panel 151 Using SyncThru Web Service 155 5 Scan amp Send Scanning Understanding the Scan amp Send screen 113 8 Management tools Basic scan 121 Accessing management tools 164 Scanning with TWAIN enabled software 122 SyncThru Web Service 165 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 123 Easy Capture Manager 172 Mae scanning ia Samsung AnyWeb Print 173 Linux scanning 127 Easy Eco Driver 174 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator 175 Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager 176 Using Samsung Printer Status 179 Preparing to fax 123 Using Samsung Printer Experience 181 Using a fax in your computer 130 Using Box 188 Understanding the fax screen 132 D 9 Troubleshooting Redistributing toner Replacing the toner cartridge Replacing the imaging unit Replacing the waste toner container Clearing original document jams Tips for avoiding paper jams Clearing paper jams Understanding display messages Power and cable connecting problems Solving other problems 10 Consumables and accessories Ordering supplies and accessories Available Consumables Precautions Available accessories Available maintenance parts Installing accessories 192 194 197 201 203 209 210 224 232 233 250 251 253 254 255 256 Checking replaceable s lifespan Using a USB Drive device 11 Appendix Specifications Reg
144. dentifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the machine The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations More than one address may be configured for the router advertisement but only one will be displayed in the display screen 3 Network setup 322 Network settings configuring TCP IP 802a You can enable 802 1x authentication which is a port based authentication If this authentication is enabled the machine is not allowed to access through the Stateful Address This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6 server Manual Address This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can configure manually DHCPv6 Configuration Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us Use DHCP as directed by a router DHCPv6 is enabled when a router advertises to use DHCPv6 Always Enable DHCP Regardless of router advertisement use DHCPv6 to acquire an IPv6 address Never use DHCP Disables DHCPv6 protected side of the network until the machine is authorized Use this feature to protect your network Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Ethernet gt 802 1x from the home screen or Apps 802 1x Check to enable this feature 802 1x Authentication Method Select the authentication algorithm to use EAP MD5 Offers minimal security The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to dictionary attacks and does not support key generation PEAP Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft des
145. der DSDF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Glossary Glossary Duty Cycle Ethernet Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer performance for a month Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation such as pages per year The lifespan means the average capacity of print outs usually within the warranty period For example if the duty cycle is 48 000 pages per month assuming 20 working days a printer limits 2 400 pages a day ECM Ethernet is a frame based computer networking technology for local area networks LANs It defines wiring and signaling for the physical layer and frame formats and protocols for the media access control MAC data link layer of the OSI model Ethernet is mostly standardized as IEEE 802 3 It has become the most widespread LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present EtherTalk Error Correction Mode ECM is an optional transmission mode built into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems It automatically detects and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes caused by telephone line noise Emulation A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer networking It was included in the original Macintosh 1984 and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP IP networking FDI Emulation is a technique of one
146. document being saved The image in the Preview area indicates the current send settings such as the orientation and size of the file 8 Management tools 189 Using Box Input the folder name and select Set as Private and then tap OK Using Box 4 the appropriate information in the ID Password Confirm Password fields and then tap OK To use the Box feature tap Box from the home screen or Apps Using multi check WA This function is not available in Print and Send storage Touch and hold a folder or file then change the multi check mode Create private folder KU This function is not available in Download and USB storage Public All users can access to the files Private Set up the password to prevent unauthorized person from accessing Select the type of Storage Print or Send in which you want to create the folder 2 Tap pa 5 Create folder 8 Management tools 190 9 Troubleshooting This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error Redistributing toner 192 Replacing the toner cartridge 194 Replacing the imaging unit 197 Replacing the waste toner container 201 Clearing original document jams 203 Tips for avoiding paper jams 209 Clearing paper jams 210 Understanding display messages 224 Power and cable connecting problems 232 Solving other problems 233 WU If you cannot solve problems using this chapter contact your administrator or service center
147. dress book 150 Using the control panel Storing individual addresses 1 Lay N Tap Address on the home screen or Apps gt Tap FF add on the display screen Tap the Name input box and then enter the name of the recipient Tab favorites icon for addresses you use often and want to find easily Tap the Email input boxes to enter that information of the recipient Speed No is automatically assigned with the first number of unused numbers Use the Speed No on the numeric keypad to select an address quickly Tap the Fax input box and enter the fax number using the numeric keypad on the control panel You can enter only numbers area code first if necessary a e Inserting a pause On some telephone systems you must dial an access code like 9 and listen for a second dial tone before dialing the number In such cases you can insert a pause in the telephone number Tap the SMB Email and or FTP input boxes to enter that information of the recipient e Ifyou want a SMB or FTP server to allow anonymous connections select the Anonymous from Login Type e If the SMB server you entered is not registered to any domain leave it blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server e User Login Name Select this option to create a sub folder in the file folder you selected The sub folder is named according to the user name entered in step 5 If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same
148. e 1 Open the right door 9 Troubleshooting gg Clearing paper jams 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 3 Pull out tray 1 or 2 Close the right door If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 9 Troubleshooting aaa Clearing paper jams 4 Remove the jammed paper from the machine Paper jam in tray 3 4 K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder 5 Insert tray 1 or 2 back into the machine until it locks into place Printing automatically resumes 9 Troubleshooting ga Clearing paper jams 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out 3 Pull out tray 3 or 4 Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 9 Troubleshooting 213 Clearing paper jams 4 Remove the jammed paper from the machine 5 Insert tray 3 or 4 back into the machine until it locks into place Printing automatically resumes Paper jam in the multi purpose tray K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 If the paper is not feeding properly pull the paper out of the machine 2 Open and close the front door to resume printing 9 Troubleshooting 214 Clearing paper jams 2 R
149. e connection with the other fax machine fails The other fax machine may be turned off out of paper or cannot answer incoming calls Speak with the other machine operator and ask her him to solve out the problem Faxes do not store in memory There may not be enough memory space to store the fax If the display indicating the memory status shows delete any faxes you no longer need from the memory and then try to store the fax again Blank areas appear at the bottom of each page or on other pages with a small strip of text at the top You may have chosen the wrong paper settings in the user option setting Operating system problems Common Windows problems Condition File in Use message appears during installation Suggested solutions Exit all software applications Remove all software from the startup group then restart Windows Reinstall the printer driver General Protection Fault Exception OE Spool 32 or Illegal Operation messages appear Close all other applications reboot Windows and try printing again Fail To Print A printer timeout error occurred message appear These messages may appear during printing Just keep waiting until the machine finishes printing If the message appears in ready mode or after printing has completed check the connection and or whether an error has occurred Samsung Printer Experience is not sho
150. e HDD space Up to 100 MB 11 Appendix Specifications Network environment KU Network and wireless models only see Features by model on page 8 You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your network machine The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine Items Specifications Network interface e Ethernet 10 100 100 Base TX Wired Lan Network operating system Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e MacOSX 10 5 10 9 e UNIX OS Network protocols e TCP IPv4 e DHCP BOOTP e DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP e Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP WSD AirPrint Google Cloud Print SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS RAW LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec 11 Appendix Regulatory information This machine is designed for a normal work environment and certified with several regulatory statements Laser safety statement The printer is certified in the U S to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class 1 laser products and elsewhere is certified as a Class laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 60825 1 2007 Class laser products are not considered to be hazardous The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser radiation above a Class level during
151. e IPv6 protocol in the system Reboot the machine to apply the change IPv6 Address Shows the IPv6 address types Link local Address This is an IPv6 address starting with a prefix value FE80 This address has local link scope and is automatically generated Stateless Address This is an IPv6 address which is formed by router advertised prefix and interface identifier On a interface like Ethernet interface identifier is usually derived from the Mac address of the machine The advertised prefix depends on the router configurations More than one address may be configured for the router advertisement but only one will be displayed in the display screen Stateful Address This is an IPv6 address which is acquired by a DHCPv6 server Manual Address This is an IPv6 address which an administrator can configure manually DHCPv6 Configuration Select the DHCPv6 configuration you want to us Use DHCP as directed by a router DHCPv6 is enabled when a router advertises to use DHCPVv6 Always Enable DHCP Regardless of router advertisement use DHCPv6 to acquire an IPv6 address 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 314 Network Settings Never use DHCP Disables DHCPv6 DHCP Unique Identifier Show the DHCP Unique Identifier DHCP Identity Association Identifier Show the DHCP Identity Association Identifier 802 1x You can enable 802 1x authentication which is a port based authentication If this authenticatio
152. e Image Allows you to erase any text or images that show through from the other side of the original You can use this feature to ensure that your scanned output is clearly legible Command keys Button Name Description Keypad Open the keypad Ke Favorites Open a list of frequently used addresses 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 139 Understanding the fax screen Button Name Description re Recent View any recently used addresses pi Groups Open a list of group addresses 2 Contacts Open a list of your contacts g Pause Pause the current job Add Contacts Add a new contact to your addresses Add To Add to the destination list B Destination List Open the destination list On Hook Enable On Hook dialing When you hear the dial tone enter a fax number using the numeric keypad on the control screen Send Send the fax 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 140 Sending a fax This section explains how to send a fax and the special methods of transmission WA You can place the originals use either the DSDF or the scanner glass If the originals are placed on both the DSDF and the scanner glass the machine will read the originals on the DSDF first because it has higher scan priority Setting the fax header In some countries you are required by law to specify your fax number on any fax you send w N N AO WwW A Tap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Machine ID amp
153. e You can set the volume for button sound notice alarm and the sounds settings if necessary There are many options available for setting the tray and occurring during a fax job Using the slide bar select the desired volume and paper Make the best use of the options to fit your needs for trays and paper press the Test button to test the volume e Key Sound Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when pressing the K You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the button Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of Alarm Sound Allows you to adjust the sound volume for when notice your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings tab gt alarm Machine Settings gt System gt Input Trays see Settings tab on page 168 e Fax Sound Allows you to adjust the sound volume occurring during a fax job This option has other sub options KU If some options are grayed out it means that the grayed out option is not Feedback supported for your machine or optional parts needed to use the option are Haptic Feedback Vibrate when soft keys are press and on certain UI not installed interaction Vibration Intensity Set your touch feedback vibration intensity 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 299 Machine you can change various settings for the display Wallpaper Assigns a wallpaper for the Home screen Login screen or both Screen Allows you to adjust the L
154. e confirmation window appears Tap Box gt USB from the home screen or Apps 2 3 The machine showss all files in the USB Drive device Touch and hold folder or document you want to delete from the list KA If the file is in a folder press the folder name Tap gt Delete 4 5 Tap Delete when the confirmation window appears 10 Consumables and accessories 262 11 Appendix This chapter provides product specifications and information concerning applicable regulations e Specifications e Regulatory information e Copyright Specifications Hardware specifications R K430x series 7 X425x series Item K425x series a X422x series o K4 35x series X4 30x series Dimension Height with Duplex Automatic 829 mm 32 6 inches 829 mm 32 6 inches 879 mm 35 3 inches 879 mm 35 3 inches Document Feeder Depth 640 mm 25 2 inches Width 566 mm 22 3 inches Weight Machine without consumables and 61 8 Kg 136 2 Ibs 63 Kg 138 9 Ibs 80 Kg 176 4 Ibs 80 Kg 176 4 Ibs options 11 Appendix 264 Specifications Environmental specifications Item K425x series K430x series K435x series X422x series X425x series X430x series Printing mode Simplex e Tray 1 50dB A Tray 1 51dB A Tray 1 52dB A Tray 1 48dB A Tray 1 49dB A Tray 1 50dB A Duplex Simplex 2dBA gt MP 52QdB A MP 53dB A MP 54dB A MP 50dB A MP 51dB A MP 52 dB A e Option tray
155. e most frequently used fax settings Tap Settings 5 Fax Settings from the display screen 9 e Ifthe optional fax is not installed the fax icon will not appear on the display screen e The fax options are different from country to country depending on the International Communications Regulatory If some of the fax options explained in the instructions have been grayed out it means that the grayed out option is not supported in your communication environment e You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings tab gt Machine Settings gt Fax see Settings tab on page 168 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu gg Admin Settings Print Settings KU If important data is stored in the Box we recommend you to backup the data regularly Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine You can set print related settings When there is no specific input for printing options the machine prints with the settings you set here Set the frequently used printing settings This feature can be useful if your company has a specific printing form Application Management Tap Settings gt Print Settings from the display screen You can install or uninstall applications license If you add an application you 2 You
156. e not supported You can use advanced printing features provided by your machine This section explains how to print using a Mac Open an application and select Print from the File menu The machine name which appears in the printer properties window may differ depending on the machine in use Except for the name the composition of the printer properties Printing a document window is similar to the following When you print with a Mac you need to check the printer driver setting in each application you use Follow the steps below to print from a Mac Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper 1 Open the document you want to print You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper This feature provides a cost effective way to print draft pages 2 Open the File menu and click Page Setup Document Setup in some applications 1 Open an application and select Print from the File menu 3 Choose your paper size orientation scaling other options and make ep 2 Select Layout from the drop down list under Orientation In the Pages sure that your machine is selected Click OK per Sheet drop down list select the number of pages you want to print 4 Open the File menu and click Print a Select the oth ti t Choose the number of copies and indicate which pages to print 3 Pa BA Ul lick Print 6 Click Print 4 Click Print The machine prints the selected number of pages to print on one sheet of paper 3 Printing
157. e off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Input System Failure error number Check tray number connection There is a problem in the tray Open and close the tray If the problem persists call for service Motor Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the motor system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Input System Failure error number Pull HCF number out and insert it There is a problem in the HCF Open and close the HCF If the problem persists call for service Input System Failure error number Pull tray number out and insert it There is a problem in the tray Open and close the tray If the problem persists call for service MSOK Failure error number Call for service and Change MSOK There is a problem in the engine system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Lamp Failure error number Open the door then close it Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the lamp Open the door then close it If the problem persists call for service MSOK Failure error number Call for service There is a problem in the engine system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Network
158. earch field in the Add contact screen Enter the first few letters of a contact s name or tap the Q search icon to show all contacts In the list that appears check the boxes for the contacts you want to add and tap Done To remove an individual address from the group check the box for that address and tap delete Tap Done to save the information Searching for address book entries You can search the addresses that are currently stored in the address book 1 2 3 Tap Address book gt Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps Tap the Q search input field and enter a name or part of a name to search for The machine then displays the search results Deleting address book entries You can delete addresses currently stored in the address book 2 To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 Tap Address book gt Contacts or Groups on the home screen or Apps Check the boxes of the addresses you want to delete and tap tap nia Sub menu Action overflow 5 Delete Contacts 7 Setting up an address book 153 Using the control panel Tap OK in the confirmation window and the selected addresses are deleted from the address book Viewing the address book You can browse for individual addresses and groups Tap Address book on the home screen or Apps 1 2 Tap an address to see more information about it 2 You can tap WG edit when viewi
159. ect Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers Select your machine Right click your machine and select Set as Default Printer For Windows 7 or Windows Server 2008 R2 if Set as default printer has a gt you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer 3 Printing Print Settings in Machine You can set print related settings When there is no specific input for printing options the machine prints with the settings you set here Set the frequently used printing settings This feature can be useful if your company has a specific printing form Tab Settings gt Print Settings from the display screen General You can set Skip Blank Page Paper Source and Emulation Skip Blank Pages You can skip the blank pages during printing Paper Source You can select the tray as a paper source Emulation You can choose the emulation format Layout Layout Provides paper layout related options Orientation Select the paper orientation Duplex Select the paper orientation for duplex mode Number of Copies Select the number of copies you want to print Margin Adjust the margin for Common Duplex Common Simplex and Emulation 3 Printing Setting Device Options When you install the optional devices such as optional tray memory etc this 5 Select Device Options machine automatically detects and sets the
160. ect Network on the Printer Connection Type screen Then click Next 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive 5 Follow the instructions in the installation window From the Windowss 8 Start Screen The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if Hy your computer is connected to the Internet If not you can manually If the installation window does not appear click Start gt All programs gt download the V4 driver from Samsung website www samsung com 5 Accessories 5 Run find your product 5 Support or downloads X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows ROM drive and click OK Store You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windows Store a From Charms select Search b Click Store c Search and click Samsung Printer Experience d Click Install 3 Network setup Installing driver over the network e If you install the driver using the supplied software CD V4 driver is not Silent installation Mode installed If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen you can download from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads Silent installation mode is an installation method that does not require any user intervention Once you start the installation the machine driver and software e Ifyou want to install Samsung s print
161. ect your printer and add it to your printer 11 Ra ist 1 2 After the installation is finished click Close You need to download Linux software packages from the Samsung website to install the printer software http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Installing the Unified Linux Driver 2 You must log in as a super user root to install the machine software If you are not a super user ask your system administrator 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on Copy Unified Linux Driver package to your system 2 VI 10 11 Open Terminal program and go to the folder that you copied the package to Extract the package Move to uld folder Execute install sh command If you re not logged in as root execute the command with sudo as sudo install sh Proceed with installation When installation finished launch printing utility Go to System 5 Administration 5 Printing or execute system config printer command in Terminal program Click Add button Select your printer Click Forward button and add it to your system 1 Introduction Lao Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly follow the steps below to reinstall 4 Insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive and install the driver the driver again see Installing the driver locally on page 38 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your comp
162. ed the Scan More window appears to ask if you paaa want to scan another page If you select Yes then you can scan another page in the current job If you select No then the scanning process is completed and the remainder of the job is performed Selecting the type of originals Proof Copy Allows you to print a test copy to check the quality and alignment of the printout Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the print a proof copy After ensuring that the copy is perfect tap the Start appropriate document type for a copy job button to print the rest of the copies ID Copy Allows you to copy both sides of a two sided original onto one sheet of paper This feature is helpful for copying originals with important Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Save to Box Allows you to save scanned originals to the hard disk drive in the machine You can then print these saved documents at a later date or store them as printable files Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save a document to the hard disk drive in the machine Save as Default Allows you to save the current copy options as the default copy settings After you save the default copy settings all future copy tasks use these settings Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the current settin
163. ee Redistributing toner on page 192 4 Maintenance go Finding the serial number You might need to know the serial number of your machine when calling for a service To check the serial number of your machine follow the steps below KA The serial number is written on the beginning of all the machine reports 1 Tap Settings gt Management gt Report gt Usage Counter gt Print from the home screen or Apps OR Select the Information tab gt Usage Counters From the SyncThru Web Service 2 Check the serial number 4 Maintenance 345 Clearing memory There are few ways to clear memory to ensure the memory capacity of your machine Select one of the ways below Clearing fax memory When the fax memory is full you can erase stored fax memory There are two Clearing stored documents ways to erase the fax memory follow the steps below Check the stored documents before clearing machine memory Clearing fax memory by printing afax job 1 Tap Box from the home screen or Apps Print received fax es Fax memory will automatically be erased 2 Touch and hold folder or document you want to erase from the list 3 Tap H gt Delete Clearing fax memory without printing a fax job 2 If you clear fax memory without checking the fax job by printing it first you might erase jobs that you do not want to Be careful not to erase important documents 1 Tap Job Status from the home screen or Apps 2 Select the
164. eld 7 Setting up an address book 158 Using SyncThru Web Service uu A W N Use comma as a separator When importing the address book data from a computer to the machine the existing address book data is deleted Make sure to enter valid data If you enter invalid data unexpected errors can occur Refer to the below rules for entering valid data Speed dial A number is required for each address You cannot use duplicate numbers Only numbers are allowed User Name This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 64 byte in UTF 8 lt gt Z in not allowed Fax This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 40 byte using numbers 0 9 and special characters Email This field is not mandatory You can enter up to 128 byte in email address format ex printer domain com Access the SyncThru Web Service see Logging into SyncThru Web Service on page 166 Click Address Book tab gt Individual Select Import from the Task drop down list Select Browse and select the stored file Click Import gt OK Exporting Address Book This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Features by model on page 8 You can import the address book saved in the machine to the computer in CSV file format using SyncThru Web Service 1 Access the SyncThru Web Service see Logging into SyncThru Web Service on page 166 Click Address Book
165. emove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 1 Jam feed 2 K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 3 Close the right door 9 Troubleshooting gg Clearing paper jams 2 Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 3 Jam feed 4 K Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam 1 Open the right bottom door of the dual cassette feeder 3 Close the dual cassette feeder right bottom door 9 Troubleshooting gg Clearing paper jams 2 Paper jam inside the machine Jam Registration KU Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 3 Close the right door 9 Troubleshooting Clearing paper jams Open the fuser cover Then remove the jammed paper by gently pulling Paper jam inside of the machine Jam at Fuser out it straight out KU Click this link to open an animation about clearing a jam A The fuser area is hot Take care when removing paper from the machine 1 Open the right door 3 Close the fuser cover and the right door
166. enerates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no ENET only guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following d ax He A AB HAR BIRT E S A RE ER a BL AR ERIE AZ Bh paa e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected 11 Appendix Regulatory information Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help WA Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Canadian radio interference regulations This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference causing equipment standard entitled Digital Apparatus ICES 003 of the Industry and Science Canada Cet appareil num rique respecte les limites de bruits radio lectriques applicables aux appa
167. enu overflow ala Set the number of copies printed 4 Copying ao Understanding the copy screen Preview Copy tab Display the originals type Copy More j Button Name Description D GA fel Setting View changed options list Paper Source Duplex balak Finishing O History Me oO Set paa Preview for Shows the job preview v Auto status op A4 F a Preview for Scans for job Ly A4 play Ly A4 Preview edit This button appears to edit when scanning Start mode Adjust the prescanned image with operation gt o functions such as rotate and crop BaF Danneel Text Text Photo F Photo 7 e READY TO COPY Some features are not available to preview edit mode Start Starts a job 4 Copying 100 Understanding the copy screen Changing Darkness Ml Sub menu Action overflow You can adjust the darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images Adjust the darkness level using Add to My Program Add an app to my program list the control bar This feature allows you to print dark images lighter or light Eco When Eco mode is enabled you can select only economical printing images darker settings Tap the Eco option in the Action Overflow menu to turn Eco mode on or off Tap Darkness yee showthe slidercontial e Build Job This option can be turned on or off When this option is on After the scanning is finish
168. epresentative Limit Check The print job was too You might need to reduce the Error report prints complex complexity of the page or install more memory A PostScript The print job may not be Make sure that the print job is a error page PostScript PostScript job Check to see prints whether the software application expected a setup or PostScript header file to be sent to the machine The optional The printer driver has not Open the PostScript driver tray is not been configured to properties select the Device selected in the driver recognize the optional tray Options tab and set the tray option Possible cause The resolution setting in the printer driver may not be matched with the one in Acrobat Reader Solution Make sure that the resolution setting in your printer driver matches the one in Acrobat Reader 9 Troubleshooting ga 10 Consumables and accessories This guide provides information on purchasing Consumables accessories and maintenance parts available for your machine Ordering supplies and accessories 250 Available Consumables 251 Precautions 253 Available accessories 254 Available maintenance parts 255 Installing accessories 256 Checking replaceable s lifespan 258 Using a USB Drive device 259 WA Available accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available accessories Orderin
169. er 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 WebSite www samsung com ca support English Country Region CYPRUS Customer Care Center 8009 4000 only from landline toll free WebSite www samsung com gr support CZECH 800 SAMSUNG 800 726786 www samsung com cz support DENMARK 70 70 19 70 www samsung com dk support DOMINICA 1 800 751 2676 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English DRC 499999 www samsung com support ECUADOR 1 800 10 72670 1 800 SAMSUNG 72 6786 www samsung com latin support Spanish www samsung com latin_en support English CANADA www samsung com ca_fr support French ernie 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com HHP 02 24828200 cl support CHINA 400 810 5858 www samsung com cn support Bogota 600 12 72 www samsung com COLOMBIA Gratis desde cualquier parte del 0 support pais 01 8000 112 112 6 desde su celular SAM 726 0 800 507 7267 www samsung com 00 800 1 SAMSUNG 726 7864 latin support Spanish COSTA RICA www samsung com latin_en support English CROATIA 072 726 786 www samsung com hr support 8000 0077 www samsung com Cote D Ivoire africa_fr support EGYPT 08000 726786 16580 www samsung com eg support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide ga Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 0818 717100
170. er management tools you need to f are automatically installed on your computer You can start the silent installation install them using the supplied software CD by typing s or S in the command window 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to the network and powered on Also your machine s IP address should have been set Command line Parameters Following table shows commands that can be used in the command window 2 From Charms select Settings gt Change PC settings gt Devices 3 Click Add a device Following command line are effective and operated when command is used with s or S But h H or are exceptional commands that can be operated solely Discovered machines will be shown on the screen Click the model name or host name you wish to use amp Command line Definition Description 3 You can print a Network Configuration Report from the machine s control j f i sey sor Starts silent installation Installs machine drivers panel that will show the current machine s host name i IS without prompting any Uls or user intervention 5 The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update 3 Network setup 328 Installing driver over the network Command line p lt port name gt or P lt port name Definition Specifies printer port KU Network Port will be created by use of Standard TCP IP Port monitor For local port this port must exist
171. erent imaging unit for each one yellow Y magenta M cyan C and black K When the life of the imaging unit expires totally e The status LED turns red on and the display screen shows the error message for replacing imaging unit e Check the type of the imaging unit for your machine see Consumables and accessories on page 249 At this stage the imaging unit needs to be replaced Open the front door 1 X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 3 Push the left right locking levers and push inward at the same time as shown below Then remove the waste toner container X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Pull the corresponding imaging unit out from the machine X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 9 Troubleshooting Replacing the imaging unit 4 Remove the new imaging unit from its package If toner gets on your clothing wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash clothing in cold water Hot water sets toner into fabric X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series A e Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit e To prevent damage do not expose the imaging unit to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper to protect it if necessary Do not use sharp objects such as a knife or scissors t
172. erience The most frequently used printing menus are displayed for quick scanning 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the documents face up into the document feeder 2 Click the Samsung Printer Experience tile on the Start screen 3 Click Sean EX 4 Set up the scanning parameters such as image type document size and resolution 5 Click Prescan ey to check the image 6 Adjust the prescanned image with scanning operation functions such as rotate and mirror 8 Management tools Using Box Understanding the Box screen Command keys Documents and images printed scanned downloaded and sent from computers can be stored in the Box The Box is located on your machine s hard 0 When you selected files shows below meus disk drive HDD It means the documents are stored on the HDD You can create a password for a certain Stored Document so unauthorized users cannot access it Also you can print stored documents by using a variety of printing features and send the documents to several destination such as email server or fax You can set a Stored Document and use Stored Document feature with SyncThru Print Print files directly Send Send files to Fax Email Server Box or USB fuj Delete Delete folders and files Web Service Ifimportant data is stored in the Box we recommend you to backup the Button Name Description 4 data
173. eries X43 5x series K430x series K425x series SPL printer driver PCL printer driver PS printer driver XPS printer driver Features by model Software X4 30x series X425x series X422x series X435x series K430x series K425x series Direct Printing Utility Samsung Easy Printer Scan to PC Settings Manager Fax to PC Settings Device Settings Samsung Printer Status Samsung AnyWeb Print Samsung Easy Document Creator Easy Capture Manager SyncThru Web Service SyncThru Admin Web Service Easy Eco Driver Fax Samsung Network PC Fax Scan Twain scan driver a Download the software from the Samsung website and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Before installing check whether your computer s OS support the software Included Blank Not available Features by model Variety feature Features X430x series X425x series X422x series X435x series K430x series K425x series Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF Dual Scan Document Feeder DSDF USB Memory Interface Network Interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base TX wired LAN Network Interface 802 11b g n wireless LAN Cabinet Stand Dual Cassette Feeder Working Table Byod Table Fax Kit
174. et the scan options 5 Scan and save your scanned images 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 122 Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub These documents can be shared oversocial networking sites or fax Whether you re a student organizing research from a library or a stay at home parent sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools Scanning with Samsung Easy Document Creator KA e Available for Windows OS only Requires Windows XP or higher and Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile Samsung Easy Document Creator is installed automatically when you and save documents in multiple formats including epub format install the machine software K Click Help in the upper right corner of the window then click on any option you want to know more about 1 Place a single document face down on the document glass or load the The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides the following features documents face up into the document feeder see Loading originals on page 44 Image Scanning Use to scan single or multiple pictures Document Scanning Use to scan documents with text or text and From the Windows Start menu click Programs or All Programs images Click S
175. faxes the machine regularly checks for errors and automatically configures the fax settings to ensure a stable connection Start Allows you to automatically detect or manually specify the environment when sending or receiving faxes Select Auto Detection to automatically detect the environment or manually specify the faxing environment as Normal VolP Office Noise Home or Big Noise Initialize Diagnostics Settings Resets all the settings a May only be available for the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected see Authentication on page 305 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 7 Setting up an address book This guide gives you guidelines for the address book e Understanding the address screen e Using the control panel e Using SyncThru Web Service Understanding the address screen The Address book app allows you to access and save frequently used addresses in the machine You can save fax numbers and email addresses as well as Address screen addresses for SMB FTP and and so on Tap Address Book from the home screen or Apps If you see a different screen You can save frequently used fax numbers e mail addresses SMB server i r FTP server addresses in your machine tap O to go to the home display screen addresses y 2 Contacts Favorites Groups KA e Click the pm Help from the home screen or GH quick menu and Q Search _ E 2 then click on any option you
176. from the home screen or quick menu and then Untitled MMDDYYYY HHMMSS File Format READY TO COPY Description Quick Menu Open the quick menu Address book Open your saved address book Fax Send a fax My Program Add an app to my program List mm Sub menu Action Open the sub menu overflow 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 113 j Understanding the Scan amp Send screen Button Me Name Description When users are logged in the destination configured in their My Page profile appears You can set the destination in the Send to Destination menu of the My Page app see My Page on page 35 Administrators can also set the default destination in the sub menu Action overflow gt Send Settings gt Me Setting KA You must log in to use your Me destination If you do not log in then the machine sends the copy to the Me destination specified by the administrator Virtual Hard Key K Virtual hard keys are located on the right side of the screen When an app is launched for the first time the virtual hard keys are shown If the screen is touched the virtual hard keys always appear If the g touched the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown Button Name Description KJ Reset Reset to app default configuration On Hook When you press this button you can hear a dial tone Then enter a fax number It is similar to making a call using
177. g 00 00 0c 34 11 4e This address is usually hard coded into a Network Interface Card NIC by its manufacturer and used as an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks Modified Huffman MH is a compression method for decreasing the amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU T T 4 MH is a codebook based run length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress white space As most faxes consist mostly of white space this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes MMR Modified Modified READ MMR is a compression method recommended by ITU TT 6 Modem A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted information Glossary Glossary MR Originals Modified Read MR is a compression method recommended by ITU T T 4 MR encodes the first scanned line using MH The next line is compared to the first the differences determined and then the differences are encoded and transmitted NetWare A network operating system developed by Novell Inc It initially used cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC and the network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack Today NetWare supports TCP IP as well as IPX SPX OPC Organic Photo Conductor OPC is a mechanism that makes a virtual image for print usi
178. g supplies and accessories 2 Available accessories may differ from country to country Contact your sales representatives to obtain the list of available supplies and maintenance parts e See Available Consumables on page 251 e See Available accessories on page 254 To order Samsung authorized supplies accessories and maintenance parts contact your local Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine You can also visit www samsung com supplies and then select your country region to obtain the contact information for service 10 Consumables and accessories 250 Available Consumables When Consumables reach their lifespan you can order the following types of Consumables for your machine K425x series K4 30x series K435x series Type Average yield Part name Toner cartridge Average continuous black cartridge yield 25 000 standard MLT D708S Black pages Average continuous black cartridge yield 35 000 standard MLT D708L Black pages Waste toner container Approx 100 000 pages MLT W708 a Declared yield value in accordance with 5 coverage 10 Consumables and accessories 251 Available Consumables X422x series X425x series X430x series Type Toner cartridge Average yield Average continuous black cartridge yield 23 000 pages Part name CLT K808S Black Average continuous colored cartridge yield 20 000 pages Cyan Magenta Yellow CLT C808S Cyan CLT M808S M
179. ger across the screen For example Swipe up or down ona home screen or menu to scroll it Panning Touch and hold an icon then tilt the device left or right For example Use panning to move icons from your home screens or application menus to other pages Command Keys Back Return to the previous screen option or step E Home Go to the main home screen E Recent Show recently used apps Quick launch A customizable key See the next section for options 1 Introduction EI Display screen and useful menu Add quick launch From the display screen tap the Settings icon 5 Display 5 More Settings gt Quick Launch 2 Select the desired quick launch function None The icon is not shown Screen Capture BB Capture the current screen to an image file Applications Open a screen showing all apps Search Q Open the search screen 3 Tap xD Back to return to the settings menu Home Screen Overview The main home screen is the starting point for many applications and functions You can customize it with application icons shortcuts and widgets to give you instant access to information and applications You can open the default page at any time by tapping the ig icon The screen images in this user guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model 9 Depending on authentication settings a machine s users may need to enter an ID and password If this is enable
180. ging the default print settings 5 Change the settings on each tab Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the printer driver Change all print settings available in the software application first and change any remaining settings using the printer driver Click OK 0 9 If you want to change the settings for each print job change it in Printing Preferences 1 Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings 2 For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 8 select Control Panel gt Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers 3 Right click on your machine 4 For Windows XP Server 2003 Server 2008 Vista select Printing Preferences For Windows 7 8 or Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select Printing preferences KA If Printing preferences has a gt you can select other printer drivers connected to the selected printer 3 Printing 86 Setting your machine as a default machine aj BB W Click the Windows Start menu For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings For Windows XP Server 2003 select Printer and Faxes For Windows Server 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Printers For Windows 7 8 sel
181. gs as the default settings 4 Copying 101 Understanding the copy screen Restore Default Allows you to restore the copy settings to the default settings of the machine This option changes the current copy settings to the original copy settings configured at the factory Tap the Restore Default option in this menu to restore the default settings Copy Settings The Another Page Confirmation option specifies whether the machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after each page Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single copy job 2 Another Page Confirmation This option specifies whether the y machine requires you to confirm that the scanning is complete after each page Select this option to efficiently copy multiple pages in a single copy job UI Configuration Allows you to select the options that appear in the Copy menu Tap the or symbol on the menu icons to add or remove menus You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus Job progress This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job Detail Tap this button to see the status type and time of the job Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings such as the orientation and size of the printout Send Feedback Allows you to send feedback about the cur
182. h e Uncollated Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages sides 2 Sided Calendar For originals or output binding type that are printed on ol Original Size both sides but the back is rotated 180 degrees Use this option to set the actual paper size of the originals Reduce Enlarge Auto Automatically detect the size of original see Media sizes automatically detected on page 55 The reduce enlarge feature allows you print an image larger or smaller than the original Tap the icons on the screen to reduce a copy by 25 to 99 or enlarge a copy by 101 to 400 Mixed Size If the original uses a combination of both Letter and Legal size paper the machine can use the proper sized paper for each sheet from multiple trays For example if the original is 3 pages two Letter and one Auto Reduces or enlarges the copy based on the size of the output paper Legal the machine prints in order on the correct paper size for each page 100 Original Prints the copy at the same size as the original e Custom size If you need to set a custom value for a special size of paper use the arrows to set the required size Custom You can set custom percentage between 25 to 400 XY Custom You can set XY custom values between 25 to 400 4 Copying 103 Understanding the copy screen 5 Original Orientation Use this option to set the orientation of the original Upright Images Use this setting for an original document
183. h water but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into the machine Cleaning the inside During the printing process paper toner and dust particles can accumulate inside the machine These accumulations can cause print quality problems such as toner specks or smearing Cleaning the inside of the machine clears and reduces printing quality problems 4 Maintenance Cleaning the machine Toner cartridge area Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord Wait for the machine to cool down 2 Open the front cover and pull the toner cartridge out X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 3 With a dry lint free cloth wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the toner cartridge area While cleaning the inside of the machine be careful not to damage the transfer roller or any other inside parts Do not use solvents such as benzene or thinner to clean Printing quality problems can occur and cause damage to the machine Reinsert the toner cartridges Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot inside the machine Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Close the front door Ensure that the cover is securely closed X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 4 Maintenance go Cleaning the machi
184. he machine Authentication Activating access control You can choose the authentication method for user authentication Select a mode and click on the Options button This feature is also available from the machine see Authentication on page 305 Authorization Giving rights You can give permissions to a user to only use certain features of the machine Authority Management You can give different rights to different users For example you can allow user A to use all the machine s functions while giving user B only the right to print Accounting You can manage accounts 8 Management tools i SyncThru Web Service User profile You can store user information on the machine s hard drive You can use this feature to manage the users using the machine You can also group the users and manage them as a group You can add up to 1 000 entries User identified by user ID and password are allowed to modify their password They are allowed to view all of their profile information When it comes to the role users are allowed to see only the role they belong to but not its permissions Maintenance tab This tab allows you to maintain your machine by upgrading firmware managing applications and setting contact information for sending emails You can also connect to the Samsung website or download manuals and drivers by selecting the Link menu System Log You can keep logs of events that have happened in the machine
185. he Watermark drop down list Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box You can enter up to 256 characters When the First Page Only box is checked the watermark prints on the first page only Select watermark options You can select the font name style size and shade from the Font Attributes section as well as set the angle of the watermark from the Watermark Alignment and Angle section Click Add to add a new watermark to the Current Watermarks list When you finish editing click OK or Print until you exit the Print window To stop printing the watermark select None from the Watermark drop down list To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current Watermarks list and change the watermark message and options Click Update to save the changes Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Deleting a watermark To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Click the Advanced tab select Edit from the Watermark drop down list Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current Watermarks list and click Delete Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing C
186. he machine icon s in the Windows task bar You can cancel the print job with the Cancel Print from the computers Samsung Printer Status program window see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 179 3 Printing Opening printing preferences 2 When you select an option in Printing Preferences you may see a warning K The screenshot may differ depending on model mark or a An exclamation mark 4 means you can select that certain option but it is not recommended and mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine s setting or environment Printing Preferences Favorites Basic Paper Graphics Finishing Advanced Eco Samsung 2 Preview 4 Details 4 Last Used Setting A4 mm This favorite enables you to print with last used settings 210 297mm inch Normal Printing a Open the document you want to print a ee Ng 2 This 1 dou l 2 in 1 Printing Select Print from the File menu Select your printer driver from the Select Printer list GE Booklet Printing i This A W N Click Properties or Preferences Secure Printing This WA e You can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing see Easy Eco Driver on page 174 e You can check the machine s current status pressing the Printer Status button see Using Samsung Printer Status on page 179 3 Printing
187. heets stacking Envelope No 10 105 x 241 mm 4 12 x 9 5 inches Envelope No 9 98 x 225 mm 3 87 x 8 87 inches Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm 4 33 x 8 66 inches Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm 6 37 x 9 01 inches Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm 4 48 x 6 38 inches Envelope C4 229 x 324 mm 9 01 x 12 75 inches Thick paper Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 91 to 105 g m 25 to 28 Ib bond 91 to 105 g m 25 to 28 Ib bond section e 400 sheets for each tray e 50 sheets stacking Heavy weight paper Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 106 to 176 g m 29 to 47 Ib bond e 350 sheets stacking 106 to 176 g m 29 to 47 Ib bond e 20 sheets stacking Extra Heavy Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 177 to 220 g m 47 to 59 Ib bond Not available in multipurpose tray weight section 200 sheets stacking Thin paper Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 60 to 70 g m 16 to 18 Ib bond 60 to 70 g m 16 to 18 Ib bond section 520 sheets stacking 100 sheets stacking Cotton Refer to the Plain paper Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond section e 400 sheets stacking e 50 sheets stacking Colored Pre Printed Refer to the Plain paper section Refer to the Plain paper section 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond e 400 sheets stacking 75
188. hen installing accessories the battery inside the machine is a service component Do not change it by yourself There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose used batteries according to e For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt the instructions Devices and Printers For Windows 8 search for Devices and Printers 3 Right click your machine 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties For Windows 7 Windows 8 and Windows Server 2008 R2 from context menus select the Printer properties 10 Consumables and accessories 256 Installing accessories LS if U iw a If Printer properties item has mark you can select other printer drivers connected with selected printer Select Device Options The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using Select the appropriate option Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models if so it is not applicable to your machine Tray Options Select the optional tray you installed You can select the tray Storage Options Select the optional memory you installed If this feature is checked you can select the Print Mode Printer Configuration Select the printer language for the print job Administrator Settings You can select the Printer Status and EMF Spooling Admin Job Accounting Allows you to associate user and acco
189. hen you hear a fax tone from the remote machine The Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory When you receive a fax the machine begins receiving a fax machine answers the call after a specified number of rings and automatically receives the fax If you want to change to another receive mode follow the steps below Receiving automatically in Answering Machine Fax Tap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Receive Mod the displ ap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Receive Mode on the display screen mode Telephone Receive faxes by pressing On Hook and then o stare from ae ee To use this mode you must attach an answering machine to the EXT socket on i the back of your machine For more details refer to Fax kit installation guide Fax Receive incoming faxes normally and immediately enter the fax If the caller leaves a message the answering machine records the message as reception mode normal If your machine detects a fax tone on the line it automatically starts to Answering Machine Fax Use when an answering machine is attached to receive the fax your machine Your machine answers the incoming call and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine If the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line the machine automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax WA Receive start code When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones press the keys 9 on the extension phone The machine
190. her paper sizes according to your requirements Paper Type Choose the type of the paper Options available in the list box are Printer Default Plain and Thick Paper Source Select from which tray the paper is used By default it is Auto Selection Orientation Select the direction in which information is printed on a page Duplex Print on both sides of paper to save paper KU Automatic manual duplex printing may not be available depending on models You can alternatively use the Ipr printing system or other applications for odd even printing 3 Printing 96 UNIX printing Multiple pages Print several pages on one side of the paper Page Border Choose any of the border styles e g Single line hairline Double line hairline Image tab Printer specific settings tab In this tab you can change the brightness resolution or image position of your document Text tab Set the character margin line space or the columns of the actual print output Margins tab Use Margins Set the margins for the document By default margins are not enabled The user can change the margin settings by changing the values in the respective fields Set by default these values depend on the page size selected Unit Change the units to points inches or centimeters Select various options in the JCL and General frames to customize various settings These options are specific to the printer and depend on the
191. hooting 202 Clearing original document jams When an original jams while passing through the dual scan document feeder DSDF a warning message appears on the display screen Original paper jam in front of scanner A To avoid tearing the document remove the jammed document slowly and Remove any remaining pages from the DSDF gently 2 Open the DSDF cover KU To prevent document jams use the scanner glass for thick thin or mixed paper type originals 9 Troubleshooting 203 Clearing original document jams 3 Gently remove the jammed paper from the DSDF 4 Close the DSDF cover 9 Troubleshooting 204 Clearing original document jams 3 Gently remove the jammed paper from the DSDPF If you can not grasp Original paper jam inside of scanner the jammed paper use lever as shown in the picture below 1 Remove any remaining pages from the DSDF 2 Open the DSDF cover 9 Troubleshooting 205 Clearing original document jams 4 Open the DSDF input tray If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 9 Troubleshooting 206 Clearing original document jams 5 Pull the jammed paper gently out of the DSDF 7 Open the DSDF If you do not see paper in this area go to the next step 6 Close DSDF cover and DSDF input tray 9 Troubleshooting Clearing original do
192. iginals Copy one side of the original to one sheet of a booklet 2 Sided Originals Book Copy each side of an original to one sheet of a booklet 4 Copying 104 Understanding the copy screen 2 Sided Originals Calendar Copy each side of an original to one page of a booklet The second side of each original is rotated 180 degrees so the text will be upright in the booklet This feature allows you to print a single page document onto 4 9 or 16 sheets of paper for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form one poster size document E Poster Copy Book Copy Use this feature to copy a book If the book is too thick lift the RADF until its hinges are engaged by the stopper then close the RADF If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the RADF open This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner glass This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner m Image Repeat glass This option prints several copies of the original image on the same side of a single page If you have other original in the DADF all other original images get printed the same way Off Disables this feature Left Page Prints only the left page of the book Right Page Prints only the right page of the book K When you use the Image Repeat feature the ID Copy N up Booklet Both Pages From Left Prints both facing pages from the left page Book
193. iginals containing extremely fine details This option is only available if the receiving machine also Resolution Adjust the document resolution The higher this value the h supports Ultra Fine resolution clearer the result but scan time may take longer Quality Use this option to produce a high quality document The higher quality you select the larger file size Book Scan OCR Language When producing scanned output for OCR software select Use this feature to scan a book If the book is too thick lift the DADF until its the appropriate language hinges are engaged by the stopper then close the DADF If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm 1 18 inches start copying with the DADF open Off Disable this feature Left Page Scans only the left page of the book Right Page Scans only the right page of the book Both Pages From Left Scans both facing pages from the left page 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 118 Understanding the Scan 4 Send screen Both Pages From Right Scans both facing pages from the right page Original Type Book Center amp Edge Erase You can set shaded areas to erase shadows hi 3 li a aa t caused by bindings or book edges from the center and side edges of copies Use TMG setting to Improve copy quality by scleclifig tig appropratedeeumen type for the current job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images B5 Advanced Fax fax user only Text Photo Use if the
194. in If the problem persists call for service Message Imaging Unit Failure error number Install imaging unit again Meaning The imaging unit is not installed Suggested solutions Install the imaging unit If it is already installed try to reinstall the imaging unit If the problem persists call for service HCF number cassette is pulled out Insert it properly The HCF is not securely latched Close the HCF until it locks into place Imaging unit Failure error number Call for service There is a problem in the imaging unit Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service HCF number door is open Close it The HCF door is not securely latched Close the HCF door until it locks into place HCF number is not installed Install the tray The HCF is not properly installed Reinstall the HCF If the problem persists call for service Imaging unit Failure error number Please turn off then on There is a problem in the imaging unit Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service HDD System Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists HDD System Failure error number Call for service HDD Error Error number Check users guide There is a problem in the hard disk Turn the machine off and back on again If the
195. ing 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Launch a scan application such as xsane or simple scani f it s not installed please install it manually to use scan features For example you may use yum install xsane for rom package systems and apt get install xsane for deb package systems to install xsane 3 Select your device from the list and set the scan options to apply 4 Click the Scan button 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 6 Scan amp Send Faxing This guide gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine Preparing to fax Using a fax in your computer Understanding the fax screen Sending a fax Receiving a fax Preparing to fax 9 e You cannot use this machine as a fax through the internet phone For more information ask your internet service provider e We recommend you use traditional analog phone services like PSTN public switched telephone network when using a phone line as a fax line If you use internet services DSL ISDN VolP you can improve the connection quality by using a micro filter A micro filter reduces noise and improves connection quality Since a DSL micro filter is not provided with the machine contact your internet service provider EXT 1 Line port 2 Micro filter 3 DSL modem Telephone line Before you send or receive a fax you must connect the supplied cord to the wall jack Refer to Quick in
196. ing job in progress Try your job again when that job is finished The selected port is currently being used Restart your computer and try again The machine cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off The scanner driver is not installed or the operating environment is not set up properly Ensure that the machine is properly connected and the power is on then restart your computer The USB cable may be improperly connected or the power may be off 9 Troubleshooting ga Solving other problems Fax problems optional condition The machine is not working there is no display or the buttons are not working suggested solutions Unplug the power cord and plug it in again Ensure that there is power being supplied to the electrical outlet condition Faxes are not received automatically suggested solutions The receiving mode should be set to fax Make sure that there is paper in the tray Check to see if the display shows any error message If it does clear the problem Find the optimal line for communication To check that see Smart Fax Diagnostics menu see General fax settings on page 145 No dial tone sounds Check that the phone line is properly connected Check that the phone socket on the wall is working by plugging in another phone Find the optimal line for communication see General fax settings on page 145 The numbers stored in memory do not dial
197. ing preferences on page 68 document For example you use it when you want to have large gray letters reading DRAFT or CONFIDENTIAL printed diagonally across the first page 2 Click the Advanced tab and select the desired watermark from the or all pages of a document Watermark drop down list You will see the selected watermark in the Triple Cassette Feeder image Click OK or Print until you exit the print window WW r Watermark Message Allows users to enter the watermark which is the user want to print There are several predefined watermarks that come with the machine They can MA e Image file All h i ich i be modified or you can add new ones to the list age file Allows users to load the watermark image which is the user want to print Watermark name Allows users to enter the watermark name for adding KA Header You can add the selected text to the Top left Top center or Top to watermark drop domn list right e First Page Only Prints watermark only on the first page Not checked by e Footer You can add the selected text to the Bottom left Bottom center default or Bottom right 3 Printing 80 Using special print features Creating a watermark Editing a watermark 5 6 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 From the Advanced tab select Edit from t
198. int job to any selected paper size printed page by typing in a percentage you want regardless of the document size This option can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small document Ja pagpa 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 2 Click the Paper tab To change the print settings from your software application access 3 Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 4 Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box Click the Paper tab You can also click the up down arrows to select the scaling rate Select actual paper size of the originals from the Original Size Youcannotuse this feature when you select a size of paper from the Output Size Select the size of paper to be printed in the tray from the Output Size Select the Source and Type 5 Select the Source and Type Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Aa uu fF W N 6 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing Using special print features Using an existing watermark Using watermarks 1 To change the print settings from your software application access The watermark option allows you to print text or image over an existing Printing Preferences see Opening print
199. inter driver features ab e The procedures in this chapter are mainly based on Windows 7 PET ps gt l Feature XPS e Checkthe operating systems that are compatible with your machine see System requirements on page 270 Windows Mac Linux Unix Fit to page printing Your printer drivers support the following standard features Reduce and enlarge printing e Paper orientation size source and media type selection Different source for e Number of copies first page You can also use various special printing features The following table shows a Cover page options e e general overview of features supported by your printer drivers Raster compression r PCL only Some models or operating system may not support the certain feature s in Output options 8 the following table Watermark i A Overlay PCL PS y pony b Feature xps Kg Double sided e e printing duplex Windows Mac Linux Unix i EH T i a The PostScript driver is recommended for best print image quality from PostScript based Machine quality e e applications such as Acrobat Reader Adobe Illustrator Adobe Photoshop etc option Download the software from the Samsung website and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Before installing check whether your Poster printing computer s OS support the software c XPS printer
200. inting Preferences window and Wt press F1 on your keyboard Orientation x Landscape Layout Options x Layout Poster Printing Post Click Save Enter name and description and then select the desired icon Click OK When you save Favorites all current driver settings are saved um w a To use a saved setting select it in the Favorites tab The machine is now set to print according to the settings you have selected To delete saved settings select it in the Favorites tab and click Delete 3 Printing Using special print features Special print features include Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper Printing multiple pages on one sheet of paper on page 76 ANG POLE OW Page C7 You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper To print Printing booklets on page 77 more than one page per sheet the pages will be reduced in size and arranged in Printing on both sides of the paper on page 78 the order you specify You can print up to 16 pages on one sheet Change the size by percentage of your document on page 79 Fitting your document to a selected paper size on page 79 lm va Using watermarks on page 80 Using overlay on page 82 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 2 Click the Basic tab select Multiple Pages per Side in the
201. into a grounded power source If you walk around before finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again e Activating the added accessories in the PS driver properties After installing an accessory such as an optional tray PS driver users must do the additional setting Go to the PS printer properties and set the added accessory activated A When installing accessories the battery inside the machine is a service component Do not change it by yourself There is a risk of an explosion if battery is replaced by an incorrect type Dispose used batteries according to the instructions 10 Consumables and accessories 253 Available accessories You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine s Accessory function Part name performance and capacity Fax Kit This fax kit allows you to CLX FAX160 3 use your machine as a fax Accessory function Part name Fax Multiline Kit This fax multiline kit allows SL FAX2501 Cabinet Stand You can place the machine CLX DSK502T you to use the second fax on the ergonomically lane designed cabinet which lets you reach the machine FDI Foreign Device This card is installed inside CLX KIT10F conveniently Also you Interface Kit the machine to allow a can easily move the third party device suchasa cabinet with its wheels if coin operated device or a necessary and store card reader Those devices miscellaneous items like allo
202. is connected via USB cable Device List amp Latest Scanned Image The scan list displays devices that supports Samsung Printer Experience Under the device you can see the latest scanned images Your machine needs to be connected to a network to scan from here This section is for the users with multi functional printers Adding Deleting Printers If you do not have any printer added to the Samsung Printer Experience or if you want to add delete a printer follow the instructions below 9 You can only add delete network connected printers Adding a printer 1 From the Charms select Settings Or right click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings 2 Select Add Printer 3 Select the printer you want to add You can see the added printer e If you see mark you can also click mark to add printers 8 Management tools 182 Using Samsung Printer Experience Deleting a printer 1 From the Charms select Settings Or right click the Samsung Printer Experience page and select Settings 2 Select Remove Printer 3 Select the printer you want to delete 4 Click Yes You can see that the selected printer is removed from the screen Printing from Windows 8 This section explains common printing tasks from the Start screen Basic printing 1 2 3 4 Open the document to print From the Charms select Devices Select your printer from the list Se
203. is full Remove printed paper The output tray is full Remove papers from the output tray the machine resumes printing Paper Jam in exit area Paper has jammed in the exit area Clear the jam see Paper jam in exit area Jam Exit Face down on page 222 3 Paper is empty in HCF number Load paper There is no paper in the HCF Load paper in the HCF Paper is empty in tray number Load paper There is no paperin the tray Load paper in the tray Paper Jam inside of machine Paper has jammed inside of the machine Clear the jam see Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 1 Jam feed 2 on page 215 or Paper jam inside the machine Jam feed 3 Jam feed 4 on page 216 Paper is low in HCF number Load paper Running out of paper in the HCF Load paper in the HCF Paper Jam in HCF tray number Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the HCF Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 3 4 on page 212 9 Troubleshooting j Understanding display messages Message Paper jam in tray 1 Paper jam in Tray 2 Paper jam in Tray 3 Paper jam in Tray 4 Meaning Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Suggested solutions Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 1 2 on page 210 Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 1 2 on page 210 Message PPM data is incorrect Call for service amp change MSOK Meani
204. it is not available to your machine Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or Scan Options models If so it is not applicable to your machine Set file options of the scanned output Click the eo Help from the home screen or H quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about File Name Enter a file name to store the scan file name at destination File Format Select a file format for the scanned output Resolution Adjust the document resolution The higher this value the Add Destination clearer the result but scan time may take longer Quality Use this option to produce a high quality document The higher Tap to add a recipient s email address or a fax number If you want to send i PAG quality you select the larger file size to SMB FTP Box PC or USB click on respective buttons OCR Language When producing scanned output for OCR software select the appropriate language This is supported when Searchable PDF option is selected in File Format settings Original This setting is used to improve the scan quality by selecting the document type for the current scan job 1 Sided For originals that are printed on one side only 2 Sided Book For originals that are printed on both sides 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 136 Understanding the fax screen Fax Options Both Pages From Right Scans both facing pages from the right page If you send originals that are of poor qualit
205. ith an Internet connection SS a 4 Y KA Available for Windows 8 users only oa rx 3 a g4 Understanding the Samsung Printer Experience sana D 5 icati gt To open the application From the Start screen select the Samsung Printer Experience EE tile Printer Information This area gives you general information about your machine You can check information such as the machine s status location IP address and remaining toner level The Samsung Printer Experience interface comprises various useful features as described in the following table 1 8 Management tools 181 Using Samsung Printer Experience User Guide You can view the online User s Guide You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature KA This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide Order 3 Supplies Click on this button to order replacement toner cartridges online You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature Visit Samsung Links to Samsung printer website You need to be connected to the Internet to use this feature Printer Settings You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper layout emulation networking and print information through SyncThru Web Service Your machine needs to be connected to a network This button will be disabled if your machine
206. klan Tray Settings B Tray Settings Paper Size Paper Type Sound Tray Letter Plain mani Ba a koro Pian Options S Storage Ta D A4 Plain Adjustment Paran Scroll through the options by swiping up and down Cs Powers Auto Tray Switch A maiii Auto Tray Switch Determine whether or not the machine continues 6 Timers Auto Continue printing when it detects the paper does not match For example if both tray Eco Mm 1 and tray 2 are filled with the same size paper the machine automatically Paper Substitution mic prints from tray 2 after the tray 1 runs out of paper azc Language Tray Confirmation Message a E Auto Continue This option allows you to continue printing when the paper size you have set is mismatched with the paper in the tray When this option Tray1 MP Tray You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type is activated the machine continues printing using similar or large size paper If this option is inactivated the machine waits until the required size paper Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 You can set the Paper Size and Paper Type y y y z E PR is loaded in the tray Paper Substitution When the requested paper for a print job is not If the optional three Second Cassette Feeder are installed you can use this available in the tray this feature allows you to substitute similar paper size functions For example if the requested letter sized paper is not available in the tray this machine substitutes
207. ktop clients and servers For other users it is not recommended EAP MS CHAPv2 MS CHAPv2 provides two way authentication between peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response packet and an authenticator Response message on the Success packet TLS This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet between a client and server 3 Network setup ga Print settings Ports to set for network printing You can set the ports to use when printing If you want to print though the network you need to select the following ports Tap Settings gt Management gt Report gt Network Configuration from the home screen or Apps then tap Print KA You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 168 3 Network setup 324 Set Protocols You can enable disable the protocols Standard TCP IP LPR IPP ThinPrint CIFS SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol SLP Service Location Protocol Telnet SNMP V1 V2 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv3 UPnP SSDP Protocol and mDNS Multicast Domain Name System SetIP and HTTP KA You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 168 3 Network setup gg Network filtering settings You c
208. lect 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 304 Admin Settings Authentication This feature allows you to choose the authentication method for user authentication L You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Security tab gt User Access Control see Security tab on page 169 Mode Select the authentication mode Basic Authentication Activate basic authentication Users are asked to login when they select options that are only available to administrators Man Those options are marked with a or administrator only in this guide Device Authentication Activate device authentication Device authentication requests a user to login before being able to use the device Users cannot use any application without logging in Application Authentication Activate application authentication An administrator can choose the application s to require user to login to use Users cannot use the selected application s without logging in Press Application Mode to enable authentication Method Local Authentication Executes authentication process based on the user information stored at HDD in the device LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default SMB and Local Authe
209. lect the printer settings such as the number of copies and orientation 8 Management tools 183 Using Samsung Printer Experience 5 Click the Print button to start the print job Cancelling a print job If the printing job is waiting in the print queue or print spooler cancel the job as follows 1 ee e You can access this window by simply double clicking the machine icon Portrait a in the Windows task bar Color mode Color Letter You can also cancel the current job by pressing BA stop button on the control panel Pages per sheet Opening more settings The screen may appear somewhat different depending on the model or options You can set up more printing parameters 1 Open the document you want to print 2 From the Charms select Devices 3 Select your printer from the list 4 Click More settings 8 Management tools 184 Using Samsung Printer Experience Basic tab Advanced tab Samsung Printer Experience Samsung Printer Experience Advanced Original Size Paper settings Basic f es This option allows you to set the basic paper handling specifications This option allows you to choose the basic printing settings such as copies orientation and document type Layout settings Eco settings This option allows you to set the various ways to layout your documents This option allows you to choose multiple pages per side to save media 8 Management tools 185 U
210. llows you to print your document on which border line is This option is not available for Poster Printing and Booklet Printing 3 Printing 6o Opening printing preferences Double Sided Printing Paper Options This option allows you to print on both sides of paper see Printing on both e Original Size This option allows you to set the actual paper size of the sides of the paper on page 78 originals Output Size This option allows you to scale your print job to any selected paper size regardless of the originals size see Fitting your document to a Paper tab selected paper size on page 79 Percentage This option allows you to change the size of a page s contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing in a percentage you want see Change the size by percentage of your document on page 79 Use the Paper tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications Copies Source Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray Use MP Tray when printing on special materials such as envelopes and This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed You can transparencies lect 1 to 9999 ies select 1 to copies Type This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This will let you get the best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved Speical Page This option is allows you to make special pages such as cove
211. load manuals and drivers order consumable supplies register your machine on line 8 Management tools j Easy Capture Manager Available for Windows OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 8 Capture your screen and launch Easy Capture Manager by simply pressing the Print Screen key on the keyboard Now you can easily print your captured screen as captured or edited 8 Management tools Samsung AnyWeb Print 2 e Available for Windows OS users only This feature may not be available depending on model or optional goods see Software on page 8 This tool helps you screen capture preview scrap and print Windows Internet Explorer pages more easily than when you use an ordinary program Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 8 Management tools j Easy Eco Driver KA Available for Windows OS users only see Software on page 8 With the Easy Eco Driver you can apply Eco features to save paper and toner before printing Easy Eco Driver also allows you simple editing such as removing images and texts and more You can save frequently used settings as a preset How to use Open a document to print Open printing preference window see Opening printing preferences on page 68 From the Favorites tab select Eco Printing Pre
212. loaded with the top toward the back of the machine Sideways Images Use this setting for an original document loaded into the DSDF with the top of the document toward the left side of the machine or an original document placed on the scanner glass with the top of the document toward the right side of the machine Original type Use this setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for the current job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images N up Reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 16 pages onto one sheet of paper KA When you use the N Up feature the ID Copy Image Repeat Booklet Book Copy Image Shift and Poster Copy menus are disabled Off Disable this feature N Up Copies the specified number of pages from the original onto one sheet of paper Orientation You can select the direction in which information is copied on a page KU You cannot adjust the copy size using Reduce Enlarge for the N Up feature OA Booklet The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper which are then folded to produce a booklet with all pages in the correct sequence The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each image to fit on the selected paper Off Disables this feature 1 Sided Or
213. machine s status field and press the Enter key or click Go Get support for using the machine Upgrade machine software Youcan get the machine s IP address from the machine see Report on page 311 2 Your machine s SyncThru Web Service website opens 8 Management tools 165 I SyncThru Web Service IPv6 supported web browser Logging into SyncThru Web Service 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv6 addressing as a URL Before configuring options in SyncThru Web Service you need to log in as an administrator You can still use SyncThru Web Service without logging in but 2 Select one of the IPv6 address Stateless Address Stateful Address you will not have access to or view the Settings tab and the Security tab Manual Address Link Local from Network Configuration Report 1 Click Login on the upper right of the SyncThru Web Service website You can get the machine s IPv6 address from the machine report A log in page appears see Report on page 311 2 Type in the ID and Password and select the Domain Then click on LOGIN 3 Enter the IPv6 addresses eg http Zffe 10 88 194 213 77ff fe82 75b Use the same login ID Password Domain as when logging in from the machine see Log in on page 296 A The address must be enclosed in brackets a If you want to create a new user or change the password see Security tab 4 Yo
214. machine for a while use this option to save power The machine conserves more power in Power Save option than in Low Power Save mode 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 301 Machine Timers administrator only When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine cancels the held job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings You can set the amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the current menu WA You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Setup System Timeout The machine returns to the Copy menu if there is no input for the given time e Held Job Timeout When an error occurs while printing and there is no signal from the computer the machine holds a job for a specific time period before deleting it Job Timeout When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine cancels the current job You can set the amount of time the machine will wait before canceling the job ECO Allows you to save print resources and enables ecofriendly printing Default Mode Select whether to turn the Eco mode on or off K On Forced Sets the Eco mode on If a user wants to turn the Eco mode off the user needs to enter the password
215. machine obtaining the same results as another An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different system so that the second system behaves like the first system Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior which is in contrast to simulation which concerns an abstract model of the system being simulated often considering its internal state Foreign Device Interface FDI is a card installed inside the machine to allowa third party device such as a coin operated device or a card reader Those devices allow the pay for print service on your machine FTP A File Transfer Protocol FTP is acommonly used protocol for exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP IP protocol such as the Internet or an intranet Glossary Glossary Fuser Unit Mass storage device HDD The part of a laser printer that fuses the toner onto the print media It consists of a heat roller and a pressure roller After toner is transferred onto the paper the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that the toner stays on the paper permanently which is why paper is warm when it comes out of a laser printer Gateway A connection between computer networks or between a computer network and a telephone line It is very popular as it is a computer or a network that allows access to another computer or network Grayscale A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image whe
216. machine sends information about your usage to the manufacturer Sending feedback helps the manufacturer improve the machine through updates or patches 1 Introduction 136 Understanding the pop up keyboard You can enter letters numbers or special symbols using the pop up keyboard on the display screen This keyboard uses the standard QWERTY layout for ease of use When you touch an input area the keyboard pops up on the screen The keyboard initially shows lowercase letters Cy Shift key EY Tap this key to enter one upper case letter Tap this key twice to toggle caps lock Symbol Numeric Mode Tap this key to enter numbers symbols and emoticons ABC Mode Tap this key to return the keyboard layout to the default letter keys Use the Shift key to toggle between lower case and upper case letters Space bar peasy Tap this key to enter a space 1 Introduction Installing the driver locally A locally connected machine is a machine directly attached to your computer X Setup exe replacing X with the letter which represents your CD using the cable If your machine is attached to a network skip the following ROM drive and click OK steps below and go on to installing a network connected machine s driver see For Windows 8 Installing driver over the network on page 327 If the installation window does not appear from Charms select Search gt Apps and search for Run Type in X Set
217. maging unit has almost reached its estimated cartridge life It is recommended to replace the toner cartridge A minor error has occurred and the machine is waiting for the error to be cleared Check the display message see Understanding display messages on page 224 When the problem is cleared the machine resumes its original task Blinking The toner cartridge life or imaging unit is near the end of its life Order a new toner cartridge or imaging unit You can temporarily improve print quality by redistributing the toner a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated toner cartridge life which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by operating environment percentage of image area printing interval graphics media and media size Some amount of toner may remain in the cartridge even when red LED is on and the printer stops printing b When the imaging unit has reached its end of life the machine will stop printing In this case you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru Web Service Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Setup gt Supplies Management Toner Cartridge Stop or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt System gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Stop Turning off this option and continuing to print may damage the device s system KU Check the message on the display s
218. mail individual address faxing changing receiving mode delaying a fax transmission forwarding preparing to fax receiving sending features machine features print media feature filtering IPv6 MAC network 143 143 145 144 145 142 142 141 151 143 142 145 129 143 145 143 141 6 264 267 65 170 170 170 326 firmware 171 front view 1 18 front view 2 19 G general icons 12 general settings 297 298 303 311 glossary 369 google cloud printing 338 group group address 152 H HTTP settings 169 l id copy 110 imaging unit replacing imaging unit 197 inner view 19 20 IPP settings 169 J jam Index clearing paper 210 tips for avoiding paper jams 209 JPEG USB scanning memory device 151 156 K keyboard understanding the keyboard 37 L LED machine status 25 27 understanding the status LED 25 link 171 Linux common Linux problems 247 driver installation for network connected 331 printer properties scanning linux scanning loading in the document feeder originals on the scanner glass 95 94 127 272 127 45 44 paper in multi purpose tray 53 48 special media 57 log 171 login 166 296 LPR LPD settings 169 M Mac common Mac problems 246 driver installation for network connected 330 42 scanning 125 271 mac scanning 125 machine detail 317 machine protocols 325 Macintosh printing 92 maintenance parts 255 managing address book 168 171 30
219. ments 165 scan 169 167 168 user access control 170 171 what is 165 T TCP IPv4 321 TCP IPv6 322 323 terminology 293 toner cartridge redistributing toner 192 344 194 344 sending a toner notification 343 toner unit sending the toner reorder notification 343 touch screen problem solving 233 tray auto continue 62 63 loading paper in multi purpose tray 53 ordering an optional tray 254 paper substitution 62 Tray 1 62 tray setting 299 TWAIN scan 122 U UNIX driver installation for network connected 332 printing 96 Unix system requirements 273 usage counter 34 usb understanding the usb screen 259 USB cable driver installation 38 42 USB Drive how to manage 262 printing 260 user managing 170 profile 171 user access control 170 using help 75 93 W waste toner container replacing waste toner container 201 watermark create 81 delete 81 edit 81 print 80 Windows common Windows problems 245 driver installation for network connected 327 38 41 printing 64 scanning 112 270 WSD settings 169
220. n 5 Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine 7 Setting up an address book 160 Using SyncThru Web Service 3S 59 ON a E Click Login Click Address Book Click Groups Check the group address you want to edit and press Edit Group Change the group address information Click Apply Press Undo to delete the information you entered If you press Cancel the Edit window closes Deleting address groups from Address Book Open a web browser from your networked computer Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Click Login 5 O ON OO Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login Click Address Book Click Groups Check the box for the groups you want to delete Click Delete Group Click OK when the confirmation window appears Checking address groups You can see information about address groups and add or delete individual addresses from the group in the Group Details window 1 2 Open a web browser from your networked computer Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Click Login 7 Setting up an address book 161 Using SyncThru Web Se
221. n color images are converted to grayscale colors are represented by various shades of gray Halftone Mass storage device HDD commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard disk is a non volatile storage device which stores digitally encoded data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces IEEE The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE is an international non profit professional organization for the advancement of technology related to electricity IEEE 1284 The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IEEE The term 1284 B refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to the peripheral for example a printer Intranet An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots while lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots A private network that uses Internet Protocols network connectivity and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of an organization s information or operations with its employees Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service the internal website Glossary Glossary IP address ISO An Internet Protocol IP address is a unique number that devices use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing the Interne
222. n is enabled the machine is not allowed to access through the protected side of the network until the machine is authorized Use this feature to protect your network 802 1x Check to enable this feature 802 1x Authentication Method Select the authentication algorithm to use EAP MD5 Offers minimal security The MD5 hash function is vulnerable to dictionary attacks and does not support key generation PEAP Recommended for users who only intend to use Microsoft desktop clients and servers For other users it is not recommended EAP MS CHAPv2 MS CHAPv2 provides two way authentication between peers by combining a peer Challenge message with the Response packet and an authenticator Response message on the Success packet TLS This is used to provide secure communication over the Internet between a client and server Network Protocol You can enable disable what you want functions as below list Feature Standard TCP IP LPR IPP ThinPrint CIFS HTTP SNMPv1 v2 SNMPv3 SNTP UPnP SSDP mDNS SetiIP SLP Telnet Description You can enable disable each functions 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 1315 Network Settings Network Security You can enable and configure these options in SyncThru Web Service only see Security tab on page 169 Feature IPSec Description You can disable IPSec if it is tu
223. n the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative 9 Troubleshooting go Solving other problems Condition Solid Color or Black pages Suggested Solutions The imaging unit may not be installed properly Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective and need replacing Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative e The machine may require repair Contact a service representative Condition Horizontal stripes Suggested Solutions If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears appear e Theimaging unit may be installed improperly Remove the imaging unit and reinsert it e The imaging unit may be defective Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Loose toner AaBbCc AaBbCc Clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative e Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 267 e Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative Ifthe problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Curl AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc anc If the printed paper is curled or paper does not feed into the machine e T
224. ne 2 Remove the waste toner container 2 If the front door is not completely closed the machine will not operate X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 6 Plug in the power cord and turn the machine on Cleaning the imaging unit area Open the front door 1 X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 3 Pull the corresponding imaging units out from the machine X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series A e To prevent damage to the imaging unit do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes Cover it with a piece of paper if necessary e Do not touch the green surface underside of the imaging unit 4 Maintenance go Cleaning the machine 4 With a dry lint free cloth wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the imaging unit area 5 Reinsert the imaging units Labels inside the machine identify each imaging unit s position Hold the handles on the new imaging unit and push the imaging unit until it locks into place X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Take out the LSU window cleaning stick X422x X425x X430x X40x series only 4 Maintenance 350 Cleaning the machine Locate the LSU window cleaning hole and insert the LSU window 9 Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place cleaning stick Slo
225. ne to use it as your network machine You can set up the basic network settings through the machine s control panel The following table shows the network environments supported by the machine Item Specification Network interface Ethernet 10 100 1000 Base T Network operating Windows XP Windows Server 2003 Windows system Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 Windows Server 2008 R2 e Various Linux OS e Various Unix OS e MacOSX 10 5 10 9 e Novell NetWare 5 x 6 x Specification TCP IPv4 DHCP BOOTP DNS WINS Bonjour SLP UPnP Standard TCP IP Printing RAW LPR IPP FTP SMB SMTP WSD LDAP Kerberos 802 1x SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec TCP IPv6 DHCP DNS RAW LPR SNMPv 1 2 3 HTTP IPSec 3 Network setup 319 Accessing network setup 1 Make sure that the ethernet cable is connected to your machine 2 Tap Settings 5 Network Settings 5 Ethernet from the home screen or Apps 3 Log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 3 Network setup 320 Network settings configuring TCP IP When you connect your machine to a network you must first configure the TCP IP settings for the machine The settings shown below are the basic settings required for using your machine as a network machine You can set TCP IP DNS server TCP IPv6 Ethernet and IP address allocation methods You can set ethernet settings Tap Settings gt Network Settings gt Ethernet from the home screen or A
226. ner of the envelope 1 Acceptable 2 Unacceptable e Envelopes with a peel off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the machine s fusing temperature of about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling creasing or jams and may even damage the fuser e When selecting envelopes consider the following factors Weight The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 90 g m2 e For the best print quality position margins no closer than 15 mm 0 6 16 Ib otherwise a jam may occur inches from the edges of the envelope Construction Prior to printing envelopes should lie flat with less than e Avoid printing over the area where the envelope s seams meet 6 mm 0 25 inches curl and should not contain air Condition Envelopes should not be wrinkled nicked or damaged 2 Media and tray 58 Printing on special media Curl Prior to printing labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm 0 5 Labels inches of curl in any direction Condition Do not use labels with wrinkles bubbles or other Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down indications of separation To avoid damaging the machine use only labels designed for use in laser e Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive material between labels machines Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing which can cause pape
227. ng There is a problem in the ppm data Suggested solutions Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 3 4 on page 212 Prepare new imaging unit The estimated life of the imaging unit is close Prepare a new imaging unit for a replacement see Replacing the imaging unit on page 197 Clear the jam Paper jam in tray number or tray door is open Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray or tray door is open Clear the jam see Paper jam in tray 1 2 on page 210 or close the tray Paper jam in MP tray Paper has jammed in the feeding area of the tray Clear the jam Paper jam or paper empty in tray Paper has jammed in the tray or there is no paper Clear the jam see Paper jam in the multi purpose tray on page 214 or load paper Prepare new toner cartridge The estimated cartridge life of toner is close Prepare a new cartridge for a replacement You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 192 9 Troubleshooting 228 Understanding display messages Message Replace with new toner cartridge Meaning The indicated toner cartridge has almost reached its estimated cartridge life Suggested solutions Replace the toner cartridge for the best print
228. ng a laser beam emitted from a laser printer and it is usually green or rust colored and has a cylinder shape An imaging unit containing a drum slowly wears the drum surface by its usage in the printer and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets worn from contact with the cartridge development brush cleaning mechanism and paper The first example of something such as a document photograph or text etc which is copied reproduced or translated to produce others but which is not itself copied or derived from something else OSI Open Systems Interconnection OSI is a model developed by the International Organization for Standardization ISO for communications OSI offers a standard modular approach to network design that divides the required set of complex functions into manageable self contained functional layers The layers are from top to bottom Application Presentation Session Transport Network Data Link and Physical PABX A private automatic branch exchange PABX is an automatic telephone switching system within a private enterprise PCL Printer Command Language PCL is a Page Description Language PDL developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an industry standard Originally developed for early inkjet printers PCL has been released in varying levels for thermal dot matrix printer and laser printers Glossary Glossary PDF PRN file Portable Document Format P
229. ng an address to edit its information directly or when viewing an address group to see a list of that group s members 7 Setting up an address book 154 Using SyncThru Web Service You can store addresses conveniently from the networked computer using 9 Enter a name to add and select a speed dial number in the General field SyncThru Web Service Only for users registered on the machine can store addresses through login SyncThru Web Service FA A Speed Dial Number allows you to enter that number on the numeric keypad to dial that number quickly Check Favorites for addresses you use often You can easily find them in search results Storing on your local machine This method allows you to store addresses on your machine s memory You can i 1 0 Enter an email address in the Email field add addresses and group them into categories 1 1 Enter a fax number in the Fax field Adding individual addresses to the address book 12 Check the enable SMB box in SMB and enter the SMB information J Opena web browser from your networked computer 13 Entera server IP address or a host name in SMB Server Address Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example 14 Enter a server port number in SMB Server Port http 123 123 123 123 NJ 1 5 Enter a login name in Login Name Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service shows KA If you want to allow anonymous connections to
230. ng files into an E Book format Plug in Scan and fax directly from the Microsoft Office program 9 Click the Help button from the window and then click on any option you want to know about 8 Management tools Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager e Available for Windows and Mac OS users only 2 The screenshot may differ depending on operating system you are using e For Windows Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for Samsung Easy Printer Manager a Samsung Easy Printer Manager ssu Easy Printer Manager Samsung Easy Printer Manager is an application that combines Samsung machine settings into one location Samsung Easy Printer Manager combines device settings as well as printing environments settings actions and launching All of these features provide a gateway to conveniently use your Samsung machine Samsung Easy Printer Manager provides two different user interfaces for the user to choose from the basic user interface and the advanced user interface Switching between the two interfaces is easy just click a button Supplies Understanding Samsung Easy Printer Manager To open the program Printer list The Printer List displays printers installed on your computer and network printers added by network discovery Windows only For Windows Select Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager gt Samsung Easy Printer Manager
231. nism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts DIMM Dots Per Inch DPI is a measurement of resolution that is used for scanning and printing Generally higher DPI results in a higher resolution more visible detail in the image and a larger file size DRPD Dual Inline Memory Module DIMM a small circuit board that holds memory DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data received fax data DLNA The Digital Living Network Alliance DLNA is a standard that allows devices on a home network to share information with each other across the network DNS Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection Distinctive Ring is a telephone company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to answer several different telephone numbers Duplex A mechanism that will automatically turn over a sheet of paper so that the machine can print or scan on both sides of the paper A printer equipped with a Duplex Unit can print on both sides of paper during one print cycle DSDF The Domain Name Server DNS is a system that stores information associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks such as the Internet Dot Matrix Printer A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact striking an ink soaked cloth ribbon against the paper much like a typewriter A Dual Scan Document Fee
232. nks to machine specific functions This section also includes links to applications in the advanced settings If you connect your machine to a network the SyncThru Web Service icon is enabled 8 Management tools Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Alert Settings Windows only Advanced settings user interface overview This menu includes settings related to error alerting The advanced user interface is intended to be used by the person responsible Printer Alert Provides settings related to when alerts will be received for managing the network and machines Email Alert Provides options relating to receiving alerts via email Alert History Provides a history of device and toner related alerts Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Job Accounting Device Settings Provides querying of quota information of the specified job accounting user This quota information can be created and applied to devices by job accounting You can configure various machine settings such as machine setup paper software such as SyncThru or CounThru admin software layout emulation network and print information Scan to PC Settings This menu includes settings to create or delete scan to PC profiles Scan Activation Determines whether or not scanning is enabled on the device Basic tab Contains settings related general scan
233. nning problems Condition The scanner does not work Suggested solutions Make sure that you place the original to be scanned face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DSDF There may not be enough available memory to hold the document you want to scan Try the Prescan function to see if that works Try lowering the scan resolution rate Check that the machine cable is connected properly Make sure that the machine cable is not defective Switch the cable with a known good cable If necessary replace the cable Check that the scanner is configured correctly Condition The unit scans very slowly Suggested solutions Check if the machine is printing received data If so scan the document after the received data has been printed Graphics are scanned more slowly than text Communication speed slows in scan mode because of the large amount of memory required to analyze and reproduce the scanned image Set your computer to the ECP printer mode through BIOS setting It will help to increase the speed For details about how to set BIOS refer to your computer user s guide Message appears on your computer screen Device can t be set to the H W mode you want Portis being used by another program Portis Disabled Scanner is busy receiving or printing data When the current job is completed try again Invalid handle Scanning has failed There may be a copying or print
234. normal operation user maintenance or prescribed service condition Warning Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from laser scanner assembly The reflected beam although invisible can damage your eyes When using this product these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire electric shock and injury to persons GEFAHREN ATTENZIONE PRECAUCION PERIGO GEVAAR ADVARSEL ADVARSEL VARNING VAROITUS it zx zx CAUTION ATTENTION CLASS 3B INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM CLASSE 3B RADIATION LASER INVISIBLE EN CAS D OUVERTURE EVITER L EXPOSITION AU FAISCEAU KLASSE 3B UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEOFFNET STRA CLASSE 3B RAD HLENAUSSETZUNG VERMEIDEN AZIONI LASER INVISIBILI CON IL DISPOSITIVO APERTO EVITARE L ESPOSIZIONE AL RAGGIO RADIACION LASE AL ABRIR EVITE GEOPEND VERM AVATTUNA VALTA Hid 88 Dl R INVISIBLE DE CLASE 3B PRESENTE LA EXPOSICION AL HAZ CLASSE 3B RADIA O LASER INVIS VEL AO ABRIR EVITE EXPOSICAO DIRECTA AO FEIXE KLASSE 3B ONZICHTBARE LASERSTRALING INDIEN JD BLOOTSTELLING AAN DE STRAAL KLASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTRAL NG VED ABNING UNDGA UDSAETTELSE FOR STRALING KLASSE 3B USYNLIG LASERSTRALING NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA EKSPONERING FOR STRALEN KLASS 3B OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD STRALEN AR FARLIG
235. nstallation This command will open Printers and Faxes folder after the silent installation Command line h H or Definition Description Shows Command line Usage 2 3 4 Make sure that the machine is connected to your network and powered on Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop e For Mac OS X 10 8 Double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder Double click the MAC_Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon Click Continue Read the license agreement and click Continue 3 Network setup 330 Installing driver over the network 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Click Agree to agree to the license agreement Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install Enter the password and click OK Select Network Connected Printer Wired or Wireless on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue Click Add Printer button to select your printer and add it to your printer list Click IP and Select HP Jetdirect Socket in Protocol Enter the machine s IP address in the Address input field Enter the queue name in the Queue input field If you cannot determine the queue name for your machine server try using the default queue first if Auto Select does not work properly choose Select Printer Software an
236. nstallprinter from the command line This will bring up the Add Printer Wizard window Setup the printer in this window according to the following steps 2 On some UNIX OS for example on Solaris 10 just added printers may not be J Type the name of the printer enabled and or may not accept jobs In this case run the following two commands on the root terminal 2 Select the appropriate printer model from the model list accept sprinter name 3 Enter any description corresponding to the type of the printer in the enable cprinter name Type field This is optional 4 Specify any printer description in the Description field This is optional Uninstalling the printer driver package Specify the printer location in the Location field Ul 6 Type the IP address or DNS name of the printer in the Device textbox for network connected printers On IBM AIX with jetdirect Queue type KA The utility should be used to delete the printer installed in the system i f only the DNS name is possible numeric IP address is not allowed a Run uninstallprinter command from the terminal It will open the Uninstall Printer Wizard The installed printers are listed in the drop down list 7 Queue type shows the connection as Ipd or jetdirect in the corresponding list box Additionally usb type is available on Sun Solaris b Select the printer to be deleted OS c Click Delete to delete the printer from the system d Execute the
237. ntication Executes authentication process based on the user information stored at SMB server LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default Kerberos and Local Authentication Executes authentication process based on the user information stored at kerberos server LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default LDAP and Local Authentication Executes authentication process based on the user information stored at LDAPserver LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default SyncThruAaProvider Executes authentication process based on the user information allocated from SWS LUI Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For LUI by default SWS Login Screen Provides Pre Installed For SWS by default Standard Accounting Only Allows users to login by entering ID and password ID PW Login You can login from ID amp Password ID Only Login You can login from ID only Options Select what to require for the user to login Auto Logout You can use auto logout 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 305 Admin Settings Seconds You can set the auto logout time Logout Policy You can select the logout Identification type General Settings Login Restriction You can set
238. ntralized management of authentication data such as usernames and passwords using an AAA authentication authorization and accounting concept to manage network Glossary access Glossary Resolution Subnet Mask The sharpness of an image measured in Dots Per Inch DPI The higher the dpi the greater the resolution SMB Server Message Block SMB is a network protocol mainly applied to share files printers serial ports and miscellaneous communications between nodes on a network It also provides an authenticated Inter process communication mechanism SMTP The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to determine which part of the address is the network address and which part is the host address TCP IP The Transmission Control Protocol TCP and the Internet Protocol IP the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run TCR Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP is the standard for e mail transmissions across the Internet SMTP is a relatively simple text based protocol where one or more recipients of a message are specified and then the message text is transferred It is a client server protocol where the client transmits an email message to the server SSID Service Set Identifier SSID is a name of a wireless local area network WLAN All wireless devices ina WLAN use the same SSID in order
239. nts You can find the stored file in the Box see Using Box on page 188 First choose a document box in Save Location and then set Options Spool This option can be useful when handling large amounts of data If you select this setting the printer spools the document into the mass storage device and then prints it from the mass storage device queue decreasing the computer s work load Print Schedule Select this setting to print the document at a specified time 2 e Job Name This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel e User ID This option is used when you need to find a stored file using the control panel The user name automatically appears as the user name that you use to log on Windows Enter Password If the Property of the stored documents you selected is Secured you have to enter the password for the stored document This option is used for loading a stored file using the control panel Confirm Password Re enter the password to confirm it Using a favorite setting The Favorites option which is visible on each preferences tab except for the Favorites tab and Samsung tab allows you to save the current preferences for future use To save a Favorites item follow these steps 3 Printing Opening printing preferences 1 Change the settings as needed on each tab 2 Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box CT averse Click the option you want to know on the Pr
240. nts or questions regarding Samsung products contact the Samsung customer Care center Country Region 021 3611 00 Customer Care Center WebSite Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite ALGERIA wna sat SUng cont n_africa support ARGENTINE 0800 333 3733 www samsung com ar support ARMENIA 0 800 05 555 www samsung com support AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www samsung com au support AUSTRIA 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 www samsung com 7267864 at support AZERBAIJAN 0 88 555 55 55 www samsung com support 8000 GSAM 8000 4726 www samsung com ae support English BAHRAIN pp g www samsung com ae_ar support Arabic BELARUS 810 800 500 55 500 www samsung com support BANGLADESH 09612300300 www samsung com in support 02 201 24 18 www samsung com be support Dutch BELGIUM www samsung com be_fr support French BOLIVIA 800 10 7260 www samsung com HHP 4828210 cl support BOSNIA 051 331 999 www samsung com support BOTSWANA 8007260000 www samsung com support 0800 124 421 Demais cidadese www samsung com regi es br support BRAZIL pp 4004 0000 Capitais e grandes centros BULGARIA 800 111 31 be3nnaTHa www samsung com TeneqmouHHa NUHVA bg support BURUNDI 200 www samsung com support CAMEROON 7095 0077 www samsung com africa_fr support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide ga Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Cent
241. ny only Das Ger t ist nicht f r die Benutzung am Bildschirmarbeitsplatz gem BildscharbV vorgesehen Turkey only e ROHS EEE Y netmeli ine Uygundur This EEE is compliant with RoHS e Bu r n n ortalama ya am s resi 7 y l garanti suresi 2 yildir Thailand only This telecommunication equipment conforms to NTC technical requirement Canada only This product meets the applicable Industry Canada technical specifications Le present materiel est conforme aux specifications techniques applicables d Industrie Canada The Ringer Equivalence Number REN is an indication of the maximum number of devices allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination of an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the RENs of all the devices not exceed five L indice d equivalence de la sonnerie IES sert a indiquer le nombre maximal de terminaux qui peuvent etre raccordes a une interface telephonique La terminaison d une interface peut consister en une combinaison quelconque de dispositifs a la seule condition que la somme d indices d equivalence de la sonnerie de tous les dispositifs n excede pas cinq Fax Branding The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or
242. o open the imaging unit package You could damage the surface of the imaging unit 7 Pull the rubber stopper out of the developer K425x series K430x series K435x series only 5 Go to step 9 X422x series X425x series X430x series 6 Pull out the protecting pad K425x series K430x series K435x series only 9 Troubleshooting 198 Replacing the imaging unit 8 Remove the tape on the imaging unit K425x series K430x series K435x 10 Hold the handles on the new imaging unit and push the imaging unit series only until it locks into place X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 9 Remove the paper protecting the imaging unit X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Take out the LSU window cleaning stick X422x series X425x series X430x series only 9 Troubleshooting 199 Replacing the imaging unit 12 Locate the LSU window cleaning hole and insert the LSU window 14 Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place cleaning stick Slowly push and pull the LSU window cleaning stick 4 or 5 times to clean the LSU window X422x series X425x series X430x series only X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 15 Close the front door Ensure that the door is securely closed X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K4
243. o the original settings configured at the factory Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the default Scan amp Send settings Send Settings Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a destination The scanned document is sent as an image file Tap this option in the sub menu action overflow menu to scan and attach a file to the current message Filing Policy The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine handles name conflicts when saving files Print Confirmation Report You can use this feature to get confirmation on executed Scan amp Send destination s successfully or not KA If the report contains characters or fonts that the machine does not support then Unknown may appear in the report instead of the characters fonts tMe Setting Allows you to select the default destination for the send job When logged in you can select your any Send destination as the default send destination Same will appear in Scan amp Send widgets too Send to PC Scans and sends scanned output to a computer Address Book Settings This address book contains contacts that are available to all users You can use the address book to make contacts available to anyone who uses the machine Google Address Book This address book contains the contacts registered in your Google contacts list You must log into your Google account to access your Google Address Book UI Configuration Allows you to select the
244. o use the job accounting method provided by the SyncThru Web Admin Service For detailed information refer to the SyncThru Web Admin Service guide 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 1306 Admin Settings Contention Management Initial settings administrator only Allows you to set Copy Print Send Report priority You can change the initial settings when you first turn the machine on More Settings WU If you want to stop adjusting the initial settings press Exit The settings you You can set Job Progress Window and Job Deletion have set so far will be saved However the Exit button is not enabled if it s the first time using this option Job Progress Window Allows you to show job progress in display Job Deletion The Job Deletion setting specifies whether users can delete Language Select the language to use on the display screen then tap Next all jobs or only the jobs that they create Note Read and tap Next Allow all jobs to delete All users allow all jobs to delete Administrator Account Input the Name New Password Confirm Allow only own jobs to delete Users allow only own jobs to delete Password Tha admin entered aa deilt Name tied Date amp Time Set the Date Time Time Zone date and hour format and Day light Saving KU Example for selecting the time zone select your country area Device Attribution Remove the existing device name and enter the device n
245. ob Status from the home screen or Apps select the job you want to delete see Job Status on page 33 You cannot send emails with the machine while it is sending a fax Sending a fax using speed dial numbers When you are prompted to enter a destination number for your fax you can use a speed dial number previously set by you L 1 500 can be assigned for the speed dial numbers For one digit speed dial numbers press and hold the corresponding number on the numeric keypad on the control panel For two or more digit speed dial numbers press the first digit button and hold the last number on the numeric keypad on the control panel Resending automatically If the line is busy or there is no answer when you send a fax the machine automatically redials the number To change the time interval between redials and or the number of redial attempts follow the steps below Tap Settings 5 Fax Settings 5 Redial on the display screen Delaying a fax transmission You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time see Advanced Fax fax user only on page 119 2 To cancel a delayed fax tap Off before itis sent 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 142 Receiving a fax This section explains how to receive faxes and the special options available Receiving manually in Telephone mode Changing Receive Mode You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook and then pressing o star from virtual hard key w
246. occurs on Ubuntu 12 04 due to the problem in standard CUPS filter pdftops Update cups filters package to version 1 0 18 to fix the problem pdftops is a part of cups filters package Unchecking the collate option in the Print Dialog does not work For some distributions GNOME Print Dialog has an issue handling the collate option As workaround set the default value of collate option to False using the system s printing utility execute system config printer in the Terminal program Paper size and orientation are disabled in the Print Dialog when opening text files The problem occurs on Fedora 19 and it s related to leafpad text editor on Fedora 19 Please use other text editors like gedit Ki Refer to the Linux User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Linux error messages 9 Troubleshooting Solving other problems Common PostScript problems Problem The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when several printer languages are used Problem The PostScript file cannot be Possible cause The PostScript driver may not be installed correctly When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader Solution 6 0 or higher p colors print e Install the PostScript driver p incorrectly Print a configuration page and printed verify that the PS version is available for printing Ifthe problem persists contact a service r
247. on to go to the main home screen Tap the B85 icon and tap the Widget tap at the top of the screen Scroll through the list and locate your desired widget Touch and hold the widget icon This creates a copy of the widget and opens the main home screen A W N 5 Drag the widget to a desired position on the screen and release it To move the widget to a different page drag it to the edge of the screen until the screen scrolls to the desired page Removing a widget 1 Touch and hold a widget until it becomes movable 2 You can drag shortcut and place a shortcut in the trash both items turn red 1 Introduction a Display screen and useful menu This action does not uninstall a widget it only removes the copy from the home screen Moving icons in the Apps menu 1 Tap the O icon to go to the main home screen 2 Tap the B855 icon to view your current applications 3 Tap the Apps tab at the top of the screen if it is not already selected 4 Drag the icon to a desired position on the screen and release it To move to a different page drag the icon to the edge of the screen until the screen scrolls to the desired page Changing the Wallpaper You can customize the Wallpaper background of your home screens From any home screen touch and hold on an empty area of the screen Then select Set wallpaper option Tap one of the following options in the window that appears 2 Home Screen Set the wallpaper for the
248. oner cartridge see Redistributing toner on page 192 Try a different print resolution setting see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 194 Where can download the machine s driver You can get help support application machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads About this user s guide This user s guide provides information for your basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed steps to explain machine usage Do not discard this manual and keep it for future reference Read the safety information before using the machine If you have a problem using the machine refer to the troubleshooting chapter Terms used in this user s guide are explained in the glossary chapter All illustrations in this user s guide may differ from your machine depending on its options or model you purchased The screenshots in this administrator s guide may differ from your machine depending on the machine s firmware driver version The procedures in this user s guide are mainly based on Windows 7 Conventions Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably as below Document is synonymous with original Paper is synonymous with media or print media Machine refers to printer or MFP General icons Icon Text Description Gives user
249. ontact a service representative AaBbCc_ e Parts of the machine may have toner on them If the AaBbCc t defects occur on the back of the page the problem will likely correct itself after a few more pages The fusing assembly may be damaged Contact a service representative Background Background scatter results from bits of toner randomly scatter distributed on the printed page The paper may be too damp Try printing with a different batch of paper Do not open packages of paper until necessary so that the paper does not absorb too much moisture e If background scatter occurs on an envelope change the printing layout to avoid printing over areas that have overlapping seams on the reverse side Printing on seams can cause problems If background scatter covers the entire surface area of a printed page adjust the print resolution through your software application or in Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 9 Troubleshooting 239 Solving other problems Condition Suggested Solutions Misformed If characters are improperly formed and producing hollow characters images the paper stock may be too slick Try different paper see Print media specifications on page 267 AaBbCc If characters are improperly formed and producing a wavy Pona effect the scanner unit may need service Cleaning the AaBbCc scan unit or contact a service representative AaBbCc AaBbCc Page skew Ensure that
250. ontainer X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series Pull the paper dust stick out X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 4 Maintenance 1352 Cleaning the machine 4 Remove the paper dust 6 Insert the waste toner container until it locks in place X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 5 Insert the paper dust stick back X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 7 Close the front door Ensure that the cover is securely closed X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series If the message still appears do step 7and 8 again 4 Maintenance 1353 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the waste toner bottle area 3 With a dry lint free cloth wipe away any dust and spilled toner from the waste toner container area 1 Open the front door 4 Reinsert the waste toner container X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 5 Close the front door Ensure that the cover is securely closed 2 Squeeze the left right locking levers and push outward Remove the waste toner container X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series
251. optional devices If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver you can set the optional devices in Device Options L89 The Properties window may differ depending on the driver or operating system you are using 1 Click the Windows Start menu Select the appropriate option an For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings 2 For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes Some menus may not appear in the display depending on options or For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and models If so it is not applicable to your machine Sound gt Printers Tray Options Select the optional tray you installed You can select the tray For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers Storage Options Select the optional memory you installed If this feature is checked you can select the Print Mode For Windows 8 search for Devices and Printers For Windows Server 2008 R2 select Control Panel gt Hardware gt Devices and Printers Printer Configuration Select the printer language for the print job e Administrator Settings You can select the Printer Status and EMF 3 Right click your machine Spooling 4 For Windows XP 2003 2008 Vista press Properties Admin Job Accounting Allows you to associate user and account identification information with each document you print For Windows 7 Windows 8 and Windows Server 20
252. options Also some options are not available to use in the eco mode Eco Options Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the machine e None Disables this option e Eco Printing Eco mode gets activated Select Double Sided Printing Layout and Skip Blank Pages you want to use in eco mode As long as you do not change the options from the other tabs the document will be print out as set in the eco mode e Passcode 1 f the administrator sets On Forced in Default Eco Mode for this machine the eco mode is always set by this machine s eco setting while the Eco Options in the printer driver is disabled If you need to change the print settings click Password and enter the password or contact your administrator Result Simulator Result Simulator shows the result of reduced emission of carbon dioxide used electricity and the amount of saved paper in accordance with the settings you selected The results are calculated on the basis that the total number of printed y paper is one hundred without a blank page when the eco mode is disabled e Referred to the calculation coefficient about CO2 energy and paper from IEA International Energy Agency the index of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communication of Japan and www remanufacturing org uk Each model has a different index e The power consumption in printing mode refers
253. opying problems 242 paper feeding problems 233 232 237 touch screen 233 Q quick copy 109 R Raw TCP IP settings 169 rear view 20 Index regulatiory information 275 report 311 demo page 311 requirements SyncThruTM Web Service 165 S safety information 13 symbols 13 samsung printer experience 181 Samsung Printer Status 179 scan email server 169 scanner glass 44 loading documents 44 scanner glass loading documents 44 scanning Linux scanning 127 Mac 125 TWAIN 122 searching address book security system security settings user authentication serial number server settings service contact numbers settings copy 168 DNS ethernet fax gernal HTTP machine 168 169 318 297 298 303 network printer scan network system 318 324 299 SyncThruTM Web Service TCP IPv4 153 169 305 345 318 361 167 322 321 168 311 169 309 321 168 169 170 169 300 169 321 tray 299 WINS 322 sound 299 300 specifications 264 general 264 print media 267 stored documents 346 storing machine 358 paper 358 supplies 358 supplies available supplies 251 monitoring the supplies life 342 ordering 251 storing 358 SyncThru Web Service copy 168 network 169 printer 168 SyncThruTM Web Service 165 accounting 170 168 171 configuring 169 165 external authentication server 170 Index 1385 Index fax 168 information tab 167 168 log 171 maintenance tab 171 require
254. ored on your computer hard disk drive The overlay document size must be the same as the document you print with the overlay Do not create an overlay with a watermark 3 Printing CI Using special print features Using a page overlay After an overlay has been created it is ready to be printed with your document To print an overlay with a document 1 2 Create or open the document you want to print To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Click the Advanced tab Select the Print Overlay from the Overlay drop down list If the overlay file you want does not appear in the Overlay File 1 or Overlay File 2 drop down list select Load from the Overlay List Select the overlay file you want to use If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external source you can also load the file when you access the Load window After you select the file click Open The file appears in the Overlay List box and is available for printing Select the overlay from the Overlay List box If necessary check Confirm Page Overlay When Printing box If this box is checked a message window appears each time you submit a document for printing asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your document If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected the overlay automatically prints with your document 7
255. orrection fluid on the paper is completely dry before loading Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper 2 Media and tray G Loading originals Do not load booklets pamphlets transparencies or documents with other 3 Adjust the document width guides to the paper size unusual characteristics Using the DSDF you can load up to 100 sheets of paper 80 g m 20 Ib bond for one job Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before loading originals Load the originals face up into the DADF Make sure that the bottom of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input tray Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout Always keep the glass clean 2 Media and tray 46 Selecting print media You can print on a variety of print media such as plain paper envelopes labels and transparencies Always use print media that meet the guidelines for use with your machine Guidelines to select print media Print media that does not meet the guidelines outlined in this user s guide may cause the following problems e Poor print quality e Increased paper jams e Premature wear on the machine Properties such as weight composition grain and moisture content are important factors that affect the machine s performance and the output quality When you choose print materials consider the following
256. out of the output tray 9 Troubleshooting 222 Clearing paper jams If this paper jam persists make sure the bin full sensor is unfolded The bin full sensor is located in front of the output tray 9 Troubleshooting 223 Understanding display messages Messages appear on the display screen to indicate the machine s status or errors Some error messages are shown with graphics to help you troubleshoot problem Refer to the tables below to understand the messages and their meaning and correct the problem if necessary Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order e When you call for service provide the service representative with the contents of display message Ifa message is not in the table reboot the power and try the printing job again If the problem persists call for service e Some messages may not appear in the display depending on options or models color indicates the color of toner or imaging unit tray number indicates the tray number e media type indicates the media type media size indicates the paper size error number indicates the error number Message Meaning Suggested solutions Check whether the pieces of paper remain in the paper path There is a problem in the paper path Remove the pieces of paper remain in the paper path If the problem persists call for service Message Did
257. page 117 Send tab 4 Send More Original Duplex Fax Resolution File Untitled MMDDYYYY HHMMSS File Format READY TO COPY Command keys Button Name Description Quick Menu Open the quick menu Address book Open your saved address book Si Fax Send a fax My Program Add an app to my program List Sub menu Action Open the sub menu overflow m When users are logged in the destination configured in their My Page profile appears You can set the destination in the Send to Destination menu of the My Page app see My Page on page 35 Administrators can also set the default destination in the sub menu Action overflow gt Send Settings gt Me Setting 2 You must log in to use your Me destination If you do not log in then the machine sends the copy to the Me destination specified by the administrator 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 132 Understanding the fax screen Virtual Hard Key Preview 4 Virtual hard keys are located on the right side of the screen When an app is launched for the first time the virtual hard keys are shown If the screen is touched the virtual hard keys always appear If the g forea the virtual hard keys are hidden and shown Preview displays the original scanned image Button Name Description KJ Reset Reset to app default configuration On Hook When you press this button
258. paper with the print side facing up 6 Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length 2 Media and tray EJ Loading paper in the tray 7 After loading paper into the tray pinch the paper width guide and move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly touches the side of the stack Do not press the guide too tightly to the edge of the paper the guide may bend the paper Do not push the paper guide too far causing the media to warp If you do not adjust the paper width guide it may cause paper jams 2 Xa p a 2 Do not overload the tray it may cause paper jams Make sure that the paper is below the maximum paper capacity guide inside the tray 1 Paper capacity guide 2 Media and tray El Loading paper in the tray Fix the the paper length guide using the locking switch Release the 9 Insert the tray back into the machine Locking AE ONG LG E ESAU papak When you print a document set the paper type and size for the tray For information about setting the paper type and size on the control panel see Tray Settings on page 62 The standard tray and optional dual cassette feeder can automatically detect various sized paper see Media sizes automatically detected on page 55 If you set the Tray Confirmation Message ON in Tray Settings the confirmation window appears automatically Check if the paper size and type in the t
259. per has about 5 image or text on it So if the paper or original has complicated images or lots of text on it the coverage will be higher and at the same time a toner usage will be as much as the coverage CSV Comma Separated Values CSV A type of file format CSV is used to exchange data between disparate applications The file format as it is used in Microsoft Excel has become a de facto standard throughout the industry even among non Microsoft platforms DADF Collation is a process of printing a multiple copy job in sets When collation is selected the device prints an entire set before printing additional copies Control Panel A control panel is a flat typically vertical area where control or monitoring instruments are displayed They are typically found in front of the machine A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder DADF is a scanning unit that will automatically feed and turn over an original sheet of paper so that the machine can scan on both sides of the paper Default The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box state reset or initialized Glossary Glossary DHCP DPI A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a client server networking protocol A DHCP server provides configuration parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting generally information required by the client host to participate on an IP network DHCP also provides a mecha
260. pport English QATAR 1 800 10 7267864 PLDT www samsung com www samsung com ae ar support Arabic PEE 1 800 8 7267864 Globe landline Ph support PP PAO Mobil f and Mobile RWANDA 9999 www samsung com 02 4222111 Other landline support 0 801 172 678 lub 48 22 607 www samsung com 08008 726 78 64 08008 www samsung com 93 33 4 pl support ROMANIA SAMSUNG ro support 1677 6784 Apel GRATUIT POLAND HHP 0 a 672 678 lub 48 22 607 93 33 RUSSIA 8 800 555 55 55 www samsung com koszt potaczenia wedtug taryfy ru support operatora 920021230 www samsung com sa support PORTUGAL 808 20 7267 www samsung com upp pt support SAUDI ARABIA www samsung com sa_en support English SENEGAL 800 00 0077 www samsung com africa_fr support Contact SAMSUNG worldwide i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide Country Region Customer Care Center 011 321 6899 WebSite www samsung com Country Region Customer Care Center WebSite SERBIA rs support SINGAPORE 1800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com sg support 080 697 267 www samsung com SLOVENIA BYE 090 726 786 apo SLOVAKIA 0800 SAMSUNG 0800 726 786 www samsung com sk support SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com support 0034902172678 www samsung com SPAIN it HHP 0034902167267 s 3UPPO 0094117540540 www samsung com SRI LANKA it 0094115900000 SUppo SUDAN 1969 www samsung com support S
261. pps WA You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 168 Ethernet Port You can enable disable ethernet port Ethernet Speed Choose the speed rate of ethernet MAC Address Shows the Mac address of the machine TCP IP Protocol You can set IPv4 settings Tap Settings 5 Network Settings 5 Ethernet 5 TCP IPv4 from the home screen or Apps KU You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine see Settings tab on page 168 IP Setting You can choose the method for allocating IP addresses Static Select to enter IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address manually BOOTP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address are automatically allocated by the BOOTP Server DHCP IP address Subnet Mask Gateway Address are automatically allocated by the DHCP Server 3 Network setup 321 Network settings configuring TCP IP DNS Configuration You can configure the DNS server Host Name Enter the host name You can enter up to 63 characters Default name is SEC MAC address Domain Name Enter the domain name You can enter up to 128 characters Primary DNS Server Enter the address of the DNS server you want to use primarily Secondary DNS Server Enter the address
262. profile stores your contact information as well as your personal settings You can use these settings to personalize the machine to suit your usage habits and accessibility needs 1 Introduction BE Display screen and useful menu To use this feature tap My Page on the home screen or Apps 11 46 Print E Copy Fax E Send E ETC Frequency of Usage Quota Information Print M Apps Settings 2 Me Setting Copy M Fax Send F3 Send Feedback Send Ready to Copy Command keys Button Name Description Quick Menu Open the quick menu Gy Search Search for a desired menu or app My Program Open a list of the apps you added Sub menu Open the sub menu A Action overflow Button Name Description Change Allows you to change the password Password Understanding the My Page menu Allows you to modify various settings to make your experience using the machine more enjoyable Personalization Usage The Frequency of Usage graph shows how many print copy fax send or other jobs you have performed while the quota information indicates how close you are to your usage quotas Apps Settings Me Setting The Me setting setting specifies whether or not the machine sends information about your usage to the Box or another destination You can also specify where your usage information is sent Send Feedback The Send Feedback setting specifies whether or not the
263. quality when this message appears Using a cartridge beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 194 If the machine stops printing replace the toner cartridge see Replacing the toner cartridge on page 194 Message Replace with new Transfer roller Meaning The life of the transfer roller expires totally Suggested solutions Replace the transfer roller with a Samsung genuine transfer roller call for service Replace with new tray number pickup roller The life of the tray pickup roller expires totally Replace the tray pickup roller with a Samsung genuine pickup roller call for service Scanner locked or another problem occurred The CCD Charged Couple Device lock has been locked Unlock the CCD lock Or turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Replace with new imaging unit The indicated imaging unit has almost reached its estimated imaging unit life Replace the imaging unit for the best print quality when this message appears Using a imaging unit beyond this stage can result in printing quality issues see Replacing the imaging unit on page 197 Scan System Failure error number Turn off then on There is a problem in the scan system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service Replace with new fu
264. r Enter your machine s IP address as the URL in the browser for example http 123 123 123 123 Press Enter or click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service page Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Click Login Click Address Book You can sort the address book by clicking each column header For example click Speed No to sort the addresses by speed dial number Click a column a second time to reverse the sort order 8 2 w O Enter a name or part of a name to search for in the search field You can search for addresses in a specific category such as Fax Number Email SMB and so on For example if you want to find a fax number click the drop down list next to Q and select Fax Number Click amp and the search results appear You can see the addressesin a specific category such as Fax Number Email SMB etc For example if you want to see the addresses which are included fax number click drop down list below LDAP and select Fax Number Importing Address Book You can edit the exported address book in CSV file format and send it back to the machine by exporting to the machine from your computer 2 Followings are the conditions for editing the imported CSV file Password protected or security enhanced CSV file cannot be edited The CSV file needs to be saved in Notepad program in UTF 8 Do not change the first row model name version title fi
265. r selection menu to ensure that your machine is selected The software application is malfunctioning Try printing a job from another application The operating system is malfunctioning Exit Windows and reboot the computer Turn the machine off and back on again Condition The machine does not print PDF file correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Possible cause Incompatibility between the PDF file and the Acrobat products Suggested solutions Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image If the PDF file do not include the font or do have the object which is set on Interactive mode Try printing a job from Printer Driver If you are in a DOS environment the font setting for your machine may be set incorrectly Change the language setting The print quality of photos is not good Images are not clear The resolution of the photo is very low Reduce the photo size If you increase the photo size in the software application the resolution will be reduced Pages print but they are blank The toner cartridge is defective or out of toner Redistribute the toner if necessary If necessary replace the toner cartridge The file may have blank pages Check the file to ens
266. r examine the fuse you must re fit the correct 13 amp fuse You then need to replace the fuse cover If you have lost the fuse cover do not use the plug until you have another fuse cover Contact the people from you purchased the machine The 13 amp plug is the most widely used in the UK and should be suitable However some buildings mainly old ones do not have normal 13 amp plug sockets You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor Do not remove the moulded plug A If you cut off the moulded plug get rid of it straight away You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket Important warning You must earth this machine E The wires in the mains lead have the following color code Green and Yellow Earth Blue Neutral Brown Live If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug do the following You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter E or by the safety Earth symbol or colored green and yellow or green You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter N or colored black You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter L or colored red 11 Appendix 282 Regulatory information You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug adaptor or at the distribution board Declaration of conformity European countries Approvals and Certifications
267. r guides if necessary Ensure that the paper is the proper paper weight Check for copy paper or pieces of copy paper remaining in the machine after a paper jam has been cleared Smears lines marks or spots appear on copies If the defects are on the original tap Copy from the home screen or Apps see Changing Darkness on page 101 If there are no defects on the original clean the scan unit Cleaning the scan unit or contact a service representative Copy image is skewed Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DSDF Check that the copy paper is loaded correctly If the problem persists the machine may require repair Contact a service representative Blank copies print out Ensure that the original is face down on the scanner glass or face up in the DSDF Image rubs off the copy easily Replace the paper in the tray with paper from a new package In high humidity areas do not leave paper in the machine for extended periods of time Toner cartridge produces fewer copies than expected before running out of toner Your originals may contain pictures solids or heavy lines For example your originals may be forms newsletters books or other documents that use more toner The DSDF may be left open while copies are being made The machine may be turned on and off frequently 9 Troubleshooting ga Solving other problems Sca
268. r jams Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to machine components Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine more than once The adhesive backing is designed for only a single pass through the machine Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet or are wrinkled bubbled or damaged Do not load paper that does not have space between labels running the same direction as the paper is being fed Otherwise it could cause paper jams t t When selecting labels consider the following factors Adhesives The adhesive material should be stable at your machine s t fusing temperature of about 170 C 338 F for 0 1 second t Arrangement Only use labels with no exposed backing between them Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels causing x serious jams 2 Media and tray 59 Printing on special media Card stock Custom sized paper Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm 3 8 inches wide or 148 mm 5 8 inches long In the software application set margins to at least 6 4 mm 0 25 inches away from the edges of the material Letterhead Preprinted paper Single sided double sided Standard tray Face up Face down Optional dual cassette feeder Multi purpose tr
269. ral s of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls especially ringing when your line is called The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company In some cases a sum of five may not be usable on your line If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly you should immediately remove it from your telephone line as it may cause harm to the telephone network The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains among other information a product identifier in the format US AAAEQ TXXXX If requested this number must be provided to the telephone company FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate this equipment In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company should notify the customer that service may be stopped However where prior notice is impractical the company may temporarily cease service providing that they a promptly notify the customer b give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem c inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication
270. rast allows you to adjust the contrast to make the scanned output crisper or smoother You can use this feature to improve the quality of an image or increase the readability of text 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 120 Basic scan This is the usual procedure to scan your original documents Tap Scan amp Send from the home screen or Apps 1 2 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 44 3 Adjust the settings in the Send tab and More tab 4 Select a destination pu 5 Add Destination Me Email SMB FTP Box USB PC or Ki Pl Address book Start g Start from the control panel to begin scan 2 To cancel the current send job tap Esto then tap Job Status on the control panel and then delete the job you want see Job Status on page 33 VI 5 Scan amp Send Scanning 121 Scanning with TWAIN enabled software If you want to scan documents using other software you need to use TWAIN compliant software such as Adobe Photoshop Follow the steps below to scan with TWAIN compliant software 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 Place the originals face up in the DSDF or place a single original face down on the scanner glass and close the DSDF see Loading originals on page 44 3 Open an application such as Adobe Photoshop 4 Open the TWAIN window and s
271. ray Remove excess paper from the tray If you are printing on special materials use the multi purpose tray An incorrect type of paper is being used Use only paper that meets the specifications required by the machine see Print media specifications on page 267 e There may be debris inside the machine Open the front door and remove any debris e If an original does not feed into the machine the DSDF rubber pad may need to be replaced Contact a service representative Envelopes skew or fail to feed correctly Ensure that the paper guides are against both sides of the envelopes Printing problems Condition The machine does not print Possible cause The machine is not receiving power Suggested solutions Check the power cord connections Check the power switch and the power source The machine is not selected as the default machine Select your machine as your default machine in your Windows Check the machine for the following The front door is not closed Close the front door e Paper is jammed Clear the paper jam see Clearing paper jams on page 210 e No paper is loaded Load paper see Loading paper in the tray on page 48 e The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not installed Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit If a system error occurs contact your service representative The connection cable between the computer and the machine is not
272. ray are detected or not If you want to set the paper size and type or if the machine cannot detect them you can set the size and type directly in the confirmation window 2 e Ifyou experience problems with paper feeding check whether the paper meets the media specifications see Print media specifications on page 267 Then try placing one sheet at a time in the multi purpose tray see Multi purpose tray on page 53 1 Locking switch The settings made from the machine driver override the settings on the control panel To print from an application a Open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type size and source d Press OK e Start printing from an application 2 Media and tray 152 Loading paper in the tray The multi purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material such as postcards note cards and envelopes It is useful for single page printing on colored paper 1 Open the multi purpose tray and pull out the extention if necessary Tips on using the multi purpose tray Load only one type size and weight of print media at a time in the multi purpose tray To prevent paper jams do not add paper while printing when there is still paper in the multi purpose tray This also applies to other types of print
273. re send tasks use these settings Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to save the current settings as the default Scan amp Send settings Use the original type setting to improve copy quality by selecting the appropriate document type for a copy job Text Use if the original is mostly text and very few or no images Restore Default Allows you to restore the Scan amp Send settings to the Text Photo Use if the original is a mix of text and images default Scan amp Send settings of the machine This option changes the current Scan amp Send settings to the original settings configured at the factory Tap this option in the Action Overflow menu to restore the default Scan amp Send settings Photo Use if the original is mostly or exclusively images Lai Sub menu Action overflow Send Settings Allows you to quickly scan a document and send it to a destination The scanned document is sent as an image file Tap this option in the sub menu action overflow menu to scan and attach a file to the current message Add to My Program Add an app to my program list With this feature user can set default settings destinations required for each program Also can set default options as Auto Launch add shortcut to Home Filing Policy The Filing Policy setting specifies how the machine Search Search for a desired options handles name conflicts when saving files Print Confirmation Report You can use this feature to
274. regularly Samsung disclaims all responsibility for damage or loss of data caused by misuse or failure of the machine Quick Menu Open the quick menu e Clickthe Help from the home screen or quick menu and then f w p a Search Search for a desired menu or app click on any option you want to know about KY GH View Mode Select the view type My Program Show my program list 8 Management tools Using Box Button Name Sub menu Action overflow Storage Description Open the sub menu Select All Select all folders and files Print Options Set options for printing Create folder Create a folder Rename Rename a folder or a file Delete Delete folders and files Copy Copy folders and files Move Move folders or files to other storage Clear Browsing Info Clear browsing information Detail View the detail information about a folder or a file Filing Policy Select a filing policy Format Formatting files or data Button Name gt gt Forward Description Manage the forward data Button Name Description E Print Manage the stored print data Send Manage the stored send data Download Manage the stored download data E USB Use a USB memory Job progress This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job Detail Tap this button to see the status type and time of the job Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the
275. reils num riques de Classe B prescrites dans la norme sur le mat riel brouilleur Appareils Num riques ICES 003 dict e par l Industrie et Sciences Canada RFID Radio Frequency Interface Device RFID operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause interference and 2 this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device U S A France Taiwan only Taiwan only SS a EEE ERA Se MURR SIZ TEE SERRA ASAN ER gt AREER BAT R ERRE POPE AE A RAT LE BP BES ST PBL MEET fra EP EAR eg te ree ee SD HAH SEAL AA PER E LAAN Ta a Russia Kazakhstan Belarus only EAL VisroTtoputenb eCamMcyHr 3InekTpoHukc Ko JITA MaTaH qoHr 129 CamcyHr po EHrToHr ry r CyBou K xru go Pecny6nuxa Kopea Vmnoptep OOO CamcyHr InektpoHukc Pyc KomnaHuZ Anpec 125009 r Mockea yn Bo3nB8WwxeHka 10 SDR CamcyHr Onektpounkc Ko JITA MataH foHr 129 CamcyHr po EHrTOHr ry CyBoH K K Hru go Koper Pecny6nukacbi CAMCYHT 3MEKTPOHUKC K3 SHY LIEHTPAN SMDKA KLUIC 3aHabi MeKeH KaiibI KasaKcTaH Pecny6nukacbl AnMaTh K On Oapa6u gaHfbinbi 36 3 4 xabaTTap 11 Appendix Regulatory information Germa
276. rent send job If you want to receive sending job by email you can set from My page app see Understanding the My Page menu on page 36 To use this feature you may need to log in as an administrator see Log in on page 296 Setting options The Copy tab provides two sections The More tab provides four additional sections a e You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option Send gt pa Sub menu action overflow gt UI Configuration Some menus are disabled If so it is not available to your machine 9 Paper Source The paper source option sets the tray for this print job The machine prints the scanned image on the paper in the selected tray You can see icons that represent paper sizes and the amount of paper remaining in each tray 4 Copying 102 Understanding the copy screen A Duplex E Finishing You can set the machine to print copies on both sides of paper You can set the print output options You can select the Original and Output binding type either type is Book or Sets the machine to sort the copy job For example if you make 2 copies of a 3 Calendar page original one complete 3 page document will print followed by a second complete document 1 Sided For originals or output binding type that are printed on one side P j only e Collated Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals 2 Sided Book For originals or output binding type that are printed on bot
277. rned on in SyncThru Web Service Network Filtering You can disable the network filtering options if it is turned on in SyncThru Web Service IPSec You can disable IP security settings Network Filtering MAC Filtering Disable MAC filtering IPv4 Filtering Disable IPv4 filtering IPv6 Filtering Disable IPv6 filtering 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu gg System Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not applicable to your machine e Click the Help from the home screen or H quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about When you set the time and date it will be used for sending printing delayed fax print jobs or will be printed on reports However if they are not correct you need to change it to the correct time About System You can see the hardware configuration system capabilities and software version of the machine Machine Details You can check the detailed machine information Check the status of installed hardware and software versions to help you maintain the machine You can download the latest software from the Samsung website http www samsung com printer _H W Configuration Shows the status of installed hardware including optional parts e Capabilities Shows the capabilities of the hardware Software Versions Shows the software versions of the systems inst
278. ronment and measuring equipment and method the country uses 11 Appendix 266 Specifications Print media specifications Type am a print media weight Capacity Simplex tray1 2 3 4 multipurpose tray Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm 8 5 x 11 inches 71 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond 71 to 90 g m 19 to 24 Ib bond Ledger 279 x 432 mm 11 x 17 inches 520sheets of 80g m 20 Ib bond 100 sheets of 80 g m 20 Ib bond Legal 216 x 356 mm 8 5 x 14 inches for each tray Executive 184 x 267 mm 7 25 x 10 5 inches Statement 140 x 216 mm 5 5 x 8 5 inches A3 Ledger and 8K are not A3 297 x 420 mm 11 7 x 16 5 inches supported in Tray A4 210 x 297 mm 8 26 x 11 7 inches A5 148 x 210 mm 5 82 x 8 26 inches B4 257 x 364 mm 10 1 x 14 3 inches JIS B5 182 x 257 mm 7 16 x 10 11 inches ISO B5 176 x 250 mm 6 93 x 9 84 inches US Folio 216 x 330 mm 8 5 x 13 inches Oficio 216 x 343 mm 8 5 x 13 5 inches 8K 270 x 390 mm 10 75 x 15 5 inches 16K 195 x 270 mm 7 76 x 10 75 inches A6 105 x 148 mm 4 13 x 5 82 inches Not available in tray1 2 3 4 11 Appendix i Specifications print media weight Capacity Simplex Type Size Dimensions tray1 2 3 4 multipurpose tray Envelope Letter A4 Refer to the Plain paper section Not available in tray1 2 3 4 75 to 90 g m 20 to 24 Ib bond Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm 3 87 x 7 5 inches e 10 s
279. rs You can add delete or update the special page settings to the list This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver 3 Printing Opening printing preferences Graphics tab Use the Graphic tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific printing needs Quality The higher the setting the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a document Font Text Select Clear Text to print text darker than on a normal document Check All Text Black to print in solid black regardless of the color it appears on the screen Graphic Controller It allows user to emphasize edges of texts and fine lines for improving readability and align each color channel registration in color printing mode Toner Save The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing toner when printing a draft version of adocument Select Off to print in normal mode and select On to print with less toner applied to the page 3 Printing Opening printing preferences Advanced tab KA If you click Reset settings in the Advanced option returns to the default setting Use the Advanced tab to set various printing options Security Watermark Encrypts printing data first and transmits it to the machine This feature protects the printing information to prevent your data from being comprised on your network Job Encryption feat
280. rvice 5 iW CAND Enter the ID and password and select a domain as you log in the machine Click Login Click Address Book Click Groups Click the group address you want to see and click Group Details You can add individual addresses directly Check the addresses you want to add to Group Address Book in Individual Address Book You can delete individual addresses directly Check the addresses you want to delete and press Delete in Group Address Book 7 Setting up an address book 162 8 Management tools This chapter introduces management tools provided to help you make full use of your machine Accessing management tools SyncThru Web Service Easy Capture Manager Samsung AnyWeb Print Easy Eco Driver Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Using Samsung Easy Printer Manager Using Samsung Printer Status Using Samsung Printer Experience Using Box Accessing management tools Samsung provides a variety of management tools for Samsung printers 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs N e For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Apps Find Samsung Printers w Under Samsung Printers you can see installed management tools BE Click the management tool you want to use Ul After installing the driver for some management tools you can access them directly from the Start menu gt Program
281. s unauthorized people You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict printing Tap Set when finished of incoming faxes when the machine is unattended In Secure Receive mode all incoming faxes are saved to memory Tap KE Or EE EAE cand N 1 Tap Settings 5 Fax Settings 5 Secure Receive on the display screen L To deactivate the Secure Receive feature tap Off Incoming faxes will be automatically printed again WA Secure Receive mode can only be configured by a user with a registered ID and a password on the machine When the machine requests enter your ID and password 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 144 Receiving a fax Setting Received Fax Printing General fax settings Use this option to set printing options for received faxes Tap Settings gt Fax Settings gt Received Fax Printing on the display screen Duplex The machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper Output Tray Specify the tray where the fax is printed Auto Reduction Set to reduce the size of incoming pages automatically When receiving a fax containing pages as long as or longer than the paper loaded in the paper tray the machine can reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the paper loaded in the machine If you do not enable this option the machine cannot reduce the original to fit onto one page The original will be divided and printed in actual size on two or more pages Printing Large Pages Use to fit where f
282. s administrator s guide mainly describes features administrators would often use and settings to set before using the machine For some options you need to contact your local service provider to set the settings Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the settings or models If so it is not applicable to your machine Some options are only available to the administrator depending on the authentication settings selected see Authentication on page 305 Log in Depending on the authentication settings you selected you may need to log in as an administrator to access some options under Settings menu see Authentication on page 305 Contact your network service provider or network administrator for more information 1 Tap Settings from the home screen or Apps 2 Select the option you want If the option is available for only the administrator log in screen appears Enter the ID Password and Domain using the pop up keyboard which appears when you tap each field 2 e Enter the ID and password you first set when you turned on the machine see Initial settings administrator only on page 307 e You can also use the Recent Users button to find the recently used ID and Domain List button to find the domain from the list stored in the machine e When you log in you can see the ID of the logged in user on the display 3 Tap Login 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu 296 Language and Inpu
283. s information to protect the machine from A Caution possible mechanical damage or malfunction Provides additional information or detailed 2 Note specification of the machine function and feature 1 Introduction E Safety information These warnings and precautions are included to prevent injury to you and others and to prevent any potential damage to your machine Be sure to read and understand all of these instructions before using the machine After reading this section keep it in a safe place for future reference Important safety symbols Operating environment A Warning Do not use if the power cord is damaged or if the electrical outlet is O B not grounded N Explanation of all icons and signs used in this chapter This could result in electric shock or fire O Do not place anything on top of the machine water small metal or ng heavy objects candles lit cigarettes etc Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe A Warning personal iniumor death This could result in electric shock or fire Ha O e Ifthe machine gets overheated it releases smoke makes strange Caution Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor 54 noises or generates an odd odor immediately turn off the power A personal injury or property damage gt switch and unplug the machine Do not attempt e The user should be able to access the power outlet in case of S emergencies that migh
284. s of the special media such as labels envelopes or thick paper to print on both sides of paper It may cause a paper jam or damage the machine 1 To change the print settings from your software application access Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 2 Click the Basic tab From the Double Sided Printing section select the binding option you want Printer Default If you select this option this feature is determined by the setting you ve made on the control panel of the machine This option is available only when you use the PCL printer driver None Disables this feature Long Edge This option is the conventional layout used in bookbinding v FE 5 mg lil gt il gt a Short Edge This option is the conventional layout used in calendars NG gt MENI mi il gt Ill 3 Reverse Double Sided Printing Check this option to reverse the print order when duplex printing 4 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window 3 Printing Using special print features Change the size by percentage of your document Fitting your document to a selected paper size You can change the size of a document to appear larger or smaller on the This printer feature allows you to scale your pr
285. s on top of the paper whether it is packed or unpacked Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can cause it to wrinkle or curl Keep it in a temperatures between 15 C 30 C and humidity between 10 70 4 Maintenance 358 Tips for moving the machine A Use safe lifting and handling techniques If you need to move this machine you need at least four people Use the lifting handles as shown below If less than four people attempt to lift the machine it can lead to back injury Do not tilt or turn it upside down Otherwise the inside of the machine may be contaminated by toner which can cause damage to the machine or bad print quality Make sure at least four people are holding the machine securely Lock the scanner lock Moving long distances using a truck Remove the finisher optional trays or desk and inner imaging units and toner cartridges Fasten the scanner locking screw and the 3 finisher locking screws Tape trays and DSDF cover Moving short distances e g moving between floors to prevent damage from vibration Remove the finisher 4 Maintenance 359 Printing a demo page Print a demo page to check the print quality of the machine if you have not used the machine for sometime From the machine See Report on page 311 From the SyncThru Web Service See Information tab on page 167 4 Maintenance 360 i Contact SAMSUNG worldwide If you have any comme
286. s or All Programs e For Windows 8 after installing the driver for some management tools you can access them directly from the Start screen by clicking on the corresponding tile 8 Management tools 164 SyncThru Web Service This chapter gives you step by step instructions for setting up the network environment through SyncThru Web Service Required web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher is the minimum requirement for You need one of the following web browsers to use SyncThru Web Service See WED SGING Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher e Some menus may not appear on the display screen depending on the i settings or models If so it is not applicable to your machine gt Chrome 4 0 or higher FireFox 3 0 or higher Safari 3 0 or higher What is SyncThru Web Service Connecting to SyncThru Web Service If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP IP network parameters correctly you can manage the machine via SyncThru Web Service Use SyncThru Web Service to IPv4 supported web browser View the machine s device information and check its current status Change TCP IP parameters and set up other network parameters 1 Start a web browser such as Internet Explorer that supports IPv4 addressing as a URL Change the printer preference Enter the machine s IP address http xxx xxx xxx xxx in the address Set the email notifications advising of the
287. se of recycled supplies a service fee will be charged For consumables that contain toner dust toner cartridge waste toner bottle imaging unit etc follow the instructions below When disposing of the supplies follow the instructions for disposal Refer to the reseller for disposal instructions e Do not wash the supplies Fora waste toner bottle do not reuse it after emptying the bottle If you do not follow the instructions above it may cause machine malfunction and environmental pollution The warranty does not cover damages caused by a user s carelessness When toner gets on your clothing do not use hot water to wash it Hot water sets toner into fabric Use cold water Do not burn any of the supplies such as toner cartridge or fuser unit This could cause an explosion or uncontrollable fire When changing the toner cartridge or removing jammed paper be careful not to let toner dust touch your body or clothes Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested 1 Introduction Machine overview 1 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF cover Power switch 2 Reversing Automatic Document Feeder RADF width guides Power receptacle 3 Reversing Automatic Document 9 Nan AA Feeder RADF input tray nita an 4 Reversing Automatic Document 10 Feeder RADF output tray papdalada ray 1 5 Control panel 11 Front door
288. ser unit The life of the fuser unit expires totally Replace the fuser unit with a Samsung genuine fuser unit call for service Sensor Failure error number Turn off then on Call for service if the problem persists There is a problem in the sensor system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service 9 Troubleshooting 229 Understanding display messages Message Shake color toner cartridge Meaning Small amount of toner is left in the indicated cartridge Suggested solutions You may temporarily increase the printing quality by redistributing the toner see Redistributing toner on page 192 Ifthe problem persists call for service Message Toner Cartridge Failure error number Call for service Meaning There is a problem in the toner cartridge Suggested solutions Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service The clock became initial time Set a time again The time setting of machine is initialized Set the time setting in Machine Setup Toner cartridge is not compatible Check users guide The imaging unit you have installed is not for your machine Install a Samsung genuine imaging unit designed for your machine see Available Consumables on page 251 The IPv4 address assigned to wireless LAN conflicts with that of other system Check it The
289. sing Samsung Printer Experience Security tab Using the sharing feature Some features may not be available depending on the model or options If this tab is not shown or disabled it means that this features are not Samsung Printer Experience allows you to print from other applications supported installed on the computer using the sharing feature This feature is only available for printing jpeg bmp tiff gif and png file formats Samsung Printer Experience Security Select the content you want to print from other application From the Charms select Share gt Samsung Printer Experience Select the printer settings such as the number of copies and orientation Click the Print button to start the print job A W N Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission Confidential Printing This option is used for printing confidential documents You need to enter a password to print using it 8 Management tools 186 Using Samsung Printer Experience 7 Click Scan o and save the image Scanning from Windows 8 KA This section is for the users with multi functional printers K e When you place the originals in the ADF or DSDF Prescan Fed isnot available e You can skip step 5 if the Prescan option is selected Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer Scanning from Samsung Printer Exp
290. sing a WIA compliant scanner Glossary Glossary WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is a class of systems to secure wireless Wi Fi computer networks which was created to improve upon the security features of WEP WPA PSK WPA PSK WPA Pre Shared Key is special mode of WPA for small business or home users A shared key or password is configured in the wireless access point WAP and any wireless laptop or desktop devices WPA PSK generates a unique key for each session between a wireless client and the associated WAP for more advanced security WPS The Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS is a standard for establishing a wireless home network If your wireless access point supports WPS you can configure the wireless network connection easily without a computer XPS XML Paper Specification XPS is a specification for a Page Description Language PDL and a new document format which has benefits for portable document and electronic document developed by Microsoft It is an XML based specification based on a new print path and a vector based device independent document format Glossary 380 Index A accessories installing ordering accounting address book group inividual adjusting altitude AirPrint alerts altitude adjustment answering machine fax AnyWeb Print application enable disable installing managing uninstalling Viewing authentication login 256 254 170 168 168 168 297 302 336 1
291. software connecting method paper type paper size and job complexity 10 Consumables and accessories 255 j Installing accessories Disconnect the power cord When you install the optional devices such as optional tray memory etc this Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on machine automatically detects and sets the optional devices If you cannot use the optional devices you installed in this driver you can set the optional devices To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock always disconnect the power p in Device Options cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external accessories Dish icel HG PENJE ANE PIRENEI 1 Click the Windows Start menu The control board and internal accessories network interface card or memory module are sensitive to static electricity Before installing or removing any internal accessories discharge static electricity from your For Windows 8 from the Charms select Search gt Settings body by touching something metal such as the metal back plate on any 2 For Windows XP 2003 select Printers and Faxes device plugged into a grounded power source If you walk around before For Windows 2008 Vista select Control Panel gt Hardware and finishing the installation repeat this procedure to discharge any static Sound gt Printers electricity again e For Windows 7 select Control Panel gt Hardware and Sound gt Devices and Printers W
292. ssary adjust the settings for each copy such as Print Layout Your machine begins scanning the front side Original Size Paper Source Adjust to Paper Size and Align Follow the instructions on the control panel 4 Copying 110 ID card copying Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass where arrows indicate as shown Then close the scanner lid wv l 4 LE E s el Your machine begins scanning the back side 2 Ifyou do not press the Start button only the front side will be copied e Ifthe original is larger than the printable area some portions may not be printed 4 Copying aa 5 Scan amp Send Scanning Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer Understanding the Scan amp Send screen Basic scan Scanning with TWAIN enabled software Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Mac scanning Linux scanning j Understanding the Scan amp Send screen This section describes all scanning and fax functions When you tap Send from the home screen or Apps the Send screen appears This screen has two tabs Command keys and many options All options are grouped by feature so that you can configure the job easily If want to go home tap the home iii button Button Name click on any option you want to know about Send tab 4 Send More Original Duplex Fax Resolution File K Click the Help
293. st be installed This program is installed when you install the printer driver The following steps are based on the Mac OS X 10 5 or 10 6 Depending on the OS version the following steps may be different Before sending a fax add a fax driver using Fax Queue Creator 1 Open the document you want to send 2 Select Print from the File menu 3 Select a fax driver from the Printer list 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 130 Using a fax in your computer Ul Choose the number of copies and pages Choose your paper size orientation and scale Enter the recipients fax number in To input box If you have stored frequently used fax numbers you can also use Addresses by pressing the button If necessary enter the access code in Dialing Prefix If necessary check Use Cover page to send the fax with a cover page Enter the subject and message of the fax job Click Fax The Fax Queue icon appears on your Mac dock Click the icon to see the status of the fax job You can also delete hold pause and resume jobs from this window 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 131 Understanding the fax screen Tap Scan amp Send from the home screen or Apps then tap 184 to open the Fax screen If you see a different screen tap the icon to go to the home screen E e Clickthe Help from the home screen or H quick menu and then click on any option you want to know about e You can set the general options see Setting options on
294. stallation guide The method of connecting a telephone line varies by country 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 129 Using a fax in your computer You can send a fax directly from your computer Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to the same network Sending a fax Windows To send a fax from your computer the Samsung Network PC Fax program must be installed You can install the Samsung Network PC Fax driver from the software CD When the installation window appears select Installation Now You can select the Samsung Network PC Fax driver in the Select Software window 1 Open the document you want to send Select Print from the File menu N The Print window will be displayed It may look slightly different depending on your application Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window Click Print or OK Enter the recipient s fax number and set any options if necessary ga AUW For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax click Help 6 Click Send Checking a sent fax list Windows You can check a sent fax list on your computer From the Start menu click Programs or All Programs gt Samsung Printers gt Network PC Fax gt Fax Transmission History Then the Fax Journal appears with the fax list you have sent WA For more information about Fax Transmission History click Help Sending a fax Mac To send a fax from your computer the Fax Utilities program mu
295. t This menu allows you to configure the language in which to display the menus You can also set onscreen keyboard options Tap Settings gt Language and Input from the home screen or Apps When there is no input for a certain period of time the machine cancels the held job or exits the current menu and goes in to the default settings You can set the amount of time the machine will wait before it cancels a held job or exits the Language Allows you to select the language current menu Feature Description Keyboard amp Input Methods You can change the keyboard used by your machine Speech Allows you to set the speech settings for Voice Keyboard amp Input Methods input Allows you to specify the keyboard that the machine uses e Default Select the default input language and method Allows you to select the language that appears on the display screen Tap Settings gt Language from the home screen or Apps then select the language what you want e Text to speech output Provides audible readout of text for example the contents of email messages 2 Advanced Features for Settings Menu Machine Before using the machine set up the general settings aai g p g g Feature Description Power Saver Allows you to reduce energy consumption If you set this option the machine goes into power saving mode when not in use 2 e Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or models If so it is not
296. t Protocol standard IPM The International Organization for Standardization ISO is an international standard setting body composed of representatives from national standards bodies It produces world wide industrial and commercial standards ITU T The Images Per Minute IPM is a way of measuring the speed of a printer An IPM rate indicates the number of single sided sheets a printer can complete within one minute IPP The Internet Printing Protocol IPP defines a standard protocol for printing as well as managing print jobs media size resolution and so forth IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of printers and also supports access control authentication and encryption making it a much more capable and secure printing solution than older ones IPX SPX The International Telecommunication Union is an international organization established to standardize and regulate international radio and telecommunications Its main tasks include standardization allocation of the radio spectrum and organizing interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow international phone calls A T out of ITU T indicates telecommunication ITU T No 1 chart Standardized test chart published by ITU T for document facsimile transmissions JBIG IPX SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange Sequenced Packet Exchange It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems
297. t Printing Utility ForWindows8 from Charms Select Search gt Apps program depends on how the PDF file was created The Direct Printing Utility program supports the PDF version 1 7 and 2 Find Samsung Printers gt Direct Printing Utility below For a higher version you must open the file to print it 3 Select your machine from the Select Printer drop down list and click Browse What is Direct Printing Utility 4 Select the PDF file you wish to print and click Open The PDF file is added in the Select Files section Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your machine to print without having to open the file It sends data through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer driver It only supports PDF format 5 Customize the machine settings for your needs 6 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine To install this program Download the software from the Samsung website then unpack and install it http www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads 3 Printing 84 Using Direct Printing Utility Using the right click menu 1 Right click on the PDF file you wish to print and select Direct Printing The Direct Printing Utility window appears with the PDF file is added 2 Select the machine you wish to use 3 Customize the machine settings for your needs 4 Click Print The selected PDF file is sent to the machine 3 Printing G Chan
298. t a service Aa C C representative e Check the location of the machine If the area is not well ventilated this problem may occur Dropouts If faded areas generally rounded occur randomly on the page KhaBb ti Asingle sheet of paper may be defective Try reprinting A aBb di the job AaBbqi The moisture content of the paper is uneven or the paper AaBkbqi has moist spots on its surface Try a different brand of AaBb Qi paper see Print media specifications on page 267 e The paper lot is bad The manufacturing processes can cause some areas to reject toner Try a different kind or brand of paper e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to thick paper see Opening printing preferences on page 68 e Ifthese steps do not correct the problem contact a service representative Vertical lines AaBbCc Ai Ai Ai Ai Bbc Bbc BbC BbC If black vertical streaks appear on the page e The drum inside the printer has probably been scratched Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative If white vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the LSU part inside the machine may be dirty Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative If vertical streaks appear on the page e The surface of the scanner glass and its white sheet may be dirty Cleaning the inside or contact a ser
299. t number of media for each tray see Print Punched e e media specifications on page 267 Thin Cardstock e Thin Glossy e Standard tray Types k y Envelope e A4 optional dual cassette 8 Multi purpose tray feeder Labels nd Plain e e Included Blank Not available Thick e Heavy weight 8 e The media types are shown in the Printing Preferences This paper type Extra Heavy weight 1 option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded in the tray This setting appears in the list so that you can select it This will let you get the Thin e e best quality printout If not the desired print quality may not be achieved Cotton e e Color e Preprinted e e Recycled O Bond e Archive e Letterhead e e 2 Media and tray Printing on special media Temperature Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and Envelope pressure of the machine during operation e Use only well constructed envelopes with sharp and well creased folds Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes o I j p j j j p e Donot use stamped envelopes TO print an enyelopE ploce IMEE Hapsldelap e Donot use envelopes with clasps snaps windows coated lining self adhesive seals or other synthetic materials e Donot use damaged or poorly made envelopes Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope extends all the way to the cor
300. t require the user to pull the plug out This could result in electric shock or fire 8 Do not bend or place heavy objects on the power cord Kag Stepping on or allowing the power cord to be crushed by a heavy object could result in electric shock or fire y Do not remove the plug by pulling on the cord do not handle the pom plug with wet hands b This could result in electric shock or fire 1 Introduction B Safety information A Caution During an electrical storm or for a period of non operation remove the power plug from the electrical outlet This could result in electric shock or fire Be careful the paper output area is hot Burns could occur damaged unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the machine does not operate properly after these instructions have been followed unplug the machine from all interface connections and request assistance from qualified service personnel If the machine has been dropped or if the cabinet appears Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire If the plug does not easily enter the electrical outlet do not attempt to force it in O Call an electrician to change the electrical outlet or this could result in electric shock Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power telephone or PC interface cords
301. tacts registered in your Google contacts list You must log into your Google account to access your Google Address Book KI e You can customize the UI of each tab using UI configuration option UI Configuration Allows you to select the options that appear in the Scan Sande pa UBER UA OR NEON a a amp Send menu Tap the or symbol on the menu icons to add or remove e Some menus are disabled If so it is not available to your machine menus You can also tap and hold a menu icon to move it to a different Some menus may not appear on the display depending on options or position or tap Clear All to remove all the menus models If so it is not applicable to your machine Click the V Help from the home screen or A quick menu and Job progress then click on any option you want to know about This menu appears whenever the machine is processing a job Detail Tap this button to see the status type and time of the job Add Destination Preview Area Allows you to see a preview of the document being copied Tap to add a recipient s email address or a fax number If you want to send The image in the preview area indicates the current send settings such as to SMB FTP Box PC or USB click on respective buttons the orientation and size of the printout Send Feedback Allows you to send feedback about the current send job If you want to receive sending job by email you can set from My page app see Understanding the My P
302. the Login Restriction time attempts or lock out time Allows you to set up the genaral settings Logout Policy You can set the logout policy Secure Print You can login from secure print Measurement You can choose the measuring unit and default paper size Accounting You can set usage limits for each user to use each feature if Standard Supplies Management accounting method is chosen see Authentication on page 305 Allows you to set options for supplies reorder notification If you set this option the machine will display a warning message when the supplies are running out KU You can also use this feature from the SyncThru Web Service Open the Prepare the supplies in advance Web browser from your networked computer and type the IP address of your machine When SyncThru Web Service opens click the Security tab gt User Access Control gt Accounting gt Accounting Methods see 2 Imaging Unit Reorder Notification Issues a notification when the Security tab on page 186 imaging unit has the specified lifespan remaining e Toner Cartridge Reorder Notification Issues a notification when a No Accounting Select not to use this feature toner cartridge has the specified lifespan remaining e Toner Save The Toner Save setting allows the user to save printing Standard Accounting Select to use the installed job accounting method KG toner when printing a document SyncThruAaProvider Select t
303. the name format YYYY MM for example 2012 01 Year A sub folder is created every year using the name format YYYY for example 2012 Create new folder only if scan output consist of several files If you select this option and multiple files are scanned the machine creates sub folders in the file folder you selected and the sent files are stored in the sub folder If all folder creation options are enabled at the same time sent files are stored as below When a single scanned file is sent folder user name 2012 01 01 DOC jpg When multiple scanned files are sent folder user name 2012 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC000 jpg folder user name 2012 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC001 jpg folder user name 2012 01 01 DOCJPEG DOC002 jpg 0 Select the policy for generating file names in Filing Policy If the server already contains a file of the same name the file is processed based on the following options Change Name The sent file is automatically saved as a pre defined file name Cancel Do not save the sent file Overwrite Overwrite the existing file with the newly sent file 7 Setting up an address book 156 Using SyncThru Web Service 21 22 23 24 EK Enter the file name in File Name to store on the server To verify that the process is working with your settings click Test Enter FTP server information as you did for SMB Click Apply Click Undo to delete the information you entered If you click
304. the printer driver installation process This is available only for Windows If you have Internet access you can get help support application machine drivers manuals and order information from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or Downloads Supports various paper sizes see Print media specifications on page 267 Print watermark You can customize your documents with words such as Confidential see Watermark on page 72 You can print in various operating systems see System requirements on page 270 Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and or a network interface Support XOA applications xoa Nbansklp Dean Arehite clure The machine supports XOA custom applications e Regarding the XOA custom applications please contact your XOA custom application provider Features by model Some features and optional goods may not be available depending on model or country Operating System Operating System X430x series X425x series X422x series X435x series K430x series K425x series Windows Mac Linux Unix e Included Blank Not available Software You can install the printer driver and software when you insert the software CD into your CD ROM drive For windows select the printer driver and software in the Select Software to Install window Software X430x series X425x series X422x s
305. ting a Open an application and start the print menu b Open Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on Letter SEF s s page 68 i Daak Letter LEF e s s ba c Press the Paper tab in Printing Preferences and select an appropriate paper type size and source Ledger e d Press OK Madoni e Start printing from an application MERN Legal SEF e e e Executive SEF e e e Executive LEF e Statement SEF e e e A3 SEF e e e e Tray2 only A4 SEF e e A4 LEF e e e A5 SEF e e 2 Media and tray 155 Loading paper in the tray size Standard Optional dual Multi Duplex Plain tray1 2 cassette feeder purposetray printing A5 LEF B4 SEF e e e JIS B5 SEF e e JIS B5 LEF e A6 SEF e ISO B5 SEF e e e ISO B5 LEF Folio SEF e e e e Oficio SEF 8K SEF e e e Tray2 only 16K SEF e e e 16K LEF e PostCard 4x6 a This machine can detect paper of similar sizes as the listed paper sizes b SEF meaning is Short Edge Feed c LEF meaning is Long Edge Feed e Included Blank Not available 2 Media and tray Ei Printing on special media The table below shows the available special media for each tray Standard tray Types l optional dual cassette Multi purpose tray A4 feeder When using special media we recommend you feed one piece of paper at a time Check the maximum inpu
306. to the machine This could result in electric shock or fire When you are working inside the machine replacing supplies or cleaning the inside do not operate the machine You could get injured Keep cleaning supplies away from children Children could get hurt Do not disassemble repair or rebuild the machine by yourself It can damage the machine Call a certified technician when the machine needs repairing To clean and operate the machine strictly follow the user s guide provided with the machine Otherwise you could damage the machine 1 Introduction 16 Safety information Keep the power cable and the contact surface of the plug clean from dust or water Otherwise this could result in electric shock or fire When storing supplies such as toner cartridges keep them away from children Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested O Do not remove any covers or guards that are fastened with screws e Fuser units should only be repaired by a certified service technician Repair by non certified technicians could result in fire or electric shock e The machine should only be repaired by a Samsung service technician Supply usage A Caution Do not disassemble the toner cartridge Toner dust can be dangerous if inhaled or ingested Using recycled supplies such as toner can cause damage to the machine In case of damage due to the u
307. ts call for service 9 Troubleshooting 230 j Understanding display messages Message tray number cassette is pulled out Insert it properly Meaning The tray is not securely latched Suggested solutions Close the tray until it locks into place tray number door is open Close it The tray door is not securely latched Close the tray door until it locks into place UI System Failure error number Call for service There is a problem in the Ul system Turn the machine off and back on again If the problem persists call for service 802 1x authentication failed Please Contact the System Administrator Fail to authenticate Check the network authentication protocol If the problem persists call for service a Estimated cartridge life means the expected or estimated cartridge which indicates the average capacity of print outs and is designed pursuant to ISO IEC 19752 The number of pages may be affected by the percentage of image area operating environment printing interval media type and media size b When the toner cartridge has reached its end of life the machine will stop printing In this case you can choose to stop or continue printing from the SyncThru Web Service Settings gt Machine Settings gt System gt Setup gt Supplies Management gt Toner Cartridge Stop or Samsung Easy Printer Manager Device Settings gt System gt Supplies Management gt
308. ture prints your document on both sides of a paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet KU If you want to make a booklet you need to print on Letter Legal A4 JIS B5 Statement Executive A5 Ledger or JIS B4 sized print media 1 To change the print settings from your software application access the Printing Preferences see Opening printing preferences on page 68 2 Click the Basic tab select Booklet Printing from the Type drop down list 3 Click the Advanced button Then select the option you want 4 Click the Paper tab select the Original size Source and Type 3 Printing Using special print features The Booklet Printing option is not available for all paper sizes In order to find out the available paper size for this feature select the available paper size in the Original size option on the Paper tab If you select an unavailable paper size this option can be automatically canceled Select only available paper paper without 4 or gg mark 5 Click OK or Print until you exit the Print window Printing on both sides of the paper You can print on both sides of a paper duplex Before printing decide how you want your document oriented You can only use this feature with Letter Legal Oficio US Folio A4 ISO B5 JIS B5 Statement Executive A5 8K 16K Ledger Tabloid Extra or JIS B4 sized paper 2 Do not print on both side
309. tus User s Guide You can view the online User s Guide This button opens the Troubleshooting Guide when an error occurs You can directly open the troubleshooting section in the user s guide Supplies You can view the percentage of toner remaining in Information each toner cartridge The machine and the number of 2 toner cartridge s shown in the above window may differ depending on the machine in use Some machines do not have this feature 3 Option You can set printing job alert related settings Order Supplies You can order replacement toner cartridge s from online Cancel Print If print job is waiting in the print queue or printer r cancel all user s print jobs in the print queue or the printer 5 Close e Depending on the status of the machine or the supported functions the Close button may appear to close the status window 8 Management tools 180 Using Samsung Printer Experience Samsung Printer Experience is a Samsung application that combines Samsung machine settings and machine management into one location You 2 The screenshot may differ depending on the model you are using can set device settings order supplies open troubleshooting guides visit Samsung s web site and check connected machine information This application will be automatically downloaded from the Windows Store if the Samsung Printer Experience Prrnsuned machine is connected to a computer w
310. uce phone bill costs DRPD Mode Enable a user to answer several different phone numbers on the same telephone line Set the machine to recognize different ring patterns for each number This setting may not be available in your country 6 Scan amp Send Faxing 146 Receiving a fax Option Junk Fax Setup Description Use this feature to reject faxes sent from numbers stored in memory as junk fax numbers This feature is useful to block any unwanted faxes When you turn this feature on you can access additional options to set junk fax numbers This option may not be available in your country Secure Receive Set the machine to save the received faxes in memory so that unauthorized people cannot access them when you are absent This option restricts printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended e Off Select to not use secure receive e On Select to use secure receive e Print Select to print faxes in the memory You need to log in as an administrator to print out received faxes in memory Received Fax Printing Set options to print received faxes Fax Country Setting Select a country as default Before changing this connect a telephone line to the machine When you change the country a ping test is performed Option Smart Fax Diagnostics Description The Smart Fax feature optimizes the settings for your fax line e Auto Configuration When sending and receiving
311. ulatory information Copyright 258 259 264 275 285 1 Introduction These are the main components of your machine Key benefits Features by model Useful to know About this user s guide Safety information Machine overview Control panel Turning on the machine Connecting a network cable Understanding the LEDs Display screen and useful menu Understanding the pop up keyboard Installing the driver locally Reinstalling the driver Key benefits Environmentally friendly To save toner and paper this machine supports Eco feature see Eco tab on page 73 To save paper you can print multiple pages on one single sheet of paper see Using special print features on page 76 To save paper you can print on both sides of the paper double sided printing see Using special print features on page 76 To save electricity this machine automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing power consumption when not in use We recommend using recycled paper for saving energy Fast high resolution printing KEN o You can print with a resolution of up to 1 200 x 1 200 dpi X422x series X425x series X430x series Fast on demand printing X430x series For single side printing up to 30 ppm A4 or Letter X425x series For single side printing up to 25 ppm A4 or Letter X422x series For single side printing up to 20 ppm A4 or Letter You can print with a resolution of up to
312. um Inc to connect computers and peripherals Unlike the parallel port USB is designed to concurrently connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals Watermark A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light Watermarks were first introduced in Bologna Italy in 1282 they have been used by papermakers to identify their product and also on postage stamps currency and other government documents to discourage counterfeiting WEP Uniform Naming Convention UNC is a standard way to access network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products The format of a UNC path is lt servername gt lt sharename gt lt Additional directory gt URL Uniform Resource Locator URL is the global address of documents and resources on the Internet The first part of the address indicates what protocol to use the second part specifies the IP address or the domain name where the resource is located Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP is a security protocol specified in IEEE 802 11 to provide the same level of security as that of a wired LAN WEP provides security by encrypting data over radio so that it is protected as it is transmitted from one end point to another WIA Windows Imaging Architecture WIA is an imaging architecture that is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP A scan can be initiated from within these operating systems by u
313. unt identification information with each document you print User permission If you check this option only users with user permission can start a print job Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job If you want to encrypt job accounting password check Job Accounting Password Encryption Custom Paper Size Settings You can specify custom paper size 7 Click OK until you exit the Properties or Printer properties window 10 Consumables and accessories Checking replaceable s lifespan If you experience frequent paper jams or printing problems check the remaining lifespan of Consumables Replace the corresponding parts if necessary 1 Tap Settings gt Management gt Supplies Life from the main screen 2 Check the consumables life 10 Consumables and accessories 258 Using a USB Drive device This chapter explains how to use a USB Drive device with your machine Understanding the USB screen To use the USB feature tap Box gt USB from the home screen or Apps Documents and images printed scanned downloaded and sent from USB can be stored in the Box see Using Box on page 188 About USB Drive device USB Drive devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to give you more room for storing documents presentations music and videos high resolution photographs or whatever other files you want to store or move You can do the follo
314. up exe replacing Theinstallation window in this User s Guide may differ depending on the X with the letter that represents your CD ROM drive and click OK machine and interface in use If Tap to choose what happens with this disc pop up window e Only use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters 118 inches appears click the window and select Run Setup exe 3 Review and accept the installation agreements in the installation window Then click Next Windows 4 Select USB on the Printer Connection Type screen Then click Next 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and 5 Follow the instructions in the installation window powered on 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive If the installation window does not appear click Start gt All programs gt Accessories gt Run 1 Introduction EI Installing the driver locally From the Windows 8 Start Screen Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and powered on 2 e The V4 driver is automatically downloaded from the Windows Update if your computer is connected to the Internet If not you can manually download the V4 driver from Samsung website www samsung com gt find your product gt Support or downloads 2 Insert the supplied software CD into your CD ROM drive e You can download Samsung Printer Experience app from the Windows Store You need have a Microsoft account to use the Windo
315. ur machine s SyncThru Web Service website opens on page 169 Cc 8 Management tools 166 SyncThru Web Service Print Information You can print all the reports provided by your machine Information tab You can use these reports to help you maintain your machine This feature is also available in the machine see Report on page 311 This tab gives you general information about your machine You can check things such as the machine s status supplies status count information network information and more You can also print reports such as configuration page Active Alerts You can check the current alerts in the machine Use this information to troubleshoot machine errors Supplies You can check the supplies information For toner cartridges and imaging units supplies status is displayed with a visual graph showing you the amount of each supply left Page counts are also available which can help you predict when to change the supplies This feature is also available from the machine see Management on page 311 e Usage Counter You can check the billing information and usage counter of the machine This feature is also available from the machine see Counter on page 34 Current Settings Shows the current settings of the machine and network Machine Information Shows the current machine settings e Network Information Shows the current network settings Use this page as a reference and
316. ure is enabled only when the hard drive is installed The hard drive is used to decrypt the printing data See Using watermarks on page 80 Overlay See Using overlay on page 82 Job Accounting This option allows you to print with the given permission Output options User permission If you check this option only users with user permission Print Order This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages can start a print job will print Print Odd Pages and Print Even Pages are available only when you usethe PCL prnterdiiver Group permission If you check this option only groups with group permission can start a print job Skip Blank Pages This option allows you to specify not to print blank pages in the original data 9 e Click the question mark pag from the upper right corner of the window Manual Margin This option allows you to specify binding margin Binding a and click on any option you want to know about margin adjusts binding position This option is not available when you use the Kdminisinatara can enable ob accountingand eonhiqurepannietionsin PS printer driver the control panel or SyncThru Web Service For the detailed information about them see SyncThru Web Service on page 165 3 Printing Opening printing preferences The Eco tab allows you to save print resources and lead you to eco friendly printing When you select Eco Printing you can see the eco image N19 on some
317. ure that it does not contain blank pages Before printing the machine emits vapor near the output tray Using damp paper can cause vapor during printing This is not a problem Just keep printing Try a fresh ream of paper Some parts such as the controller or the board may be defective Contact a service representative The machine does not print special sized paper such as billing paper Paper size and paper size setting do not match Set the correct paper size in the Custom Paper List in the Paper tab in the Printing Preferences see Paper Options on page 70 9 Troubleshooting 236 Solving other problems Condition Possible cause Suggested solutions Your machine 7 The oil used to protect After printing about 100 color Printing quality problems has an odd the fuser is evaporating pages there will be no more smell smell during It is a temporary issue If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly there ce Ki might be a reduction in print quality See the table below to clear the problem Condition Suggested Solutions Light or faded e Ifavertical white streak or faded area appears on the page print the toner supply is low You may be able to temporarily extend the toner cartridge life If this does not improve the Aa bCc print quality install a new toner cartridge AaBbCc e The color tone might not be adjusted Adjust the color AasbCc tone
318. urn the stack of paper over in the tray Also try rotating the paper 180 in the tray e Change the printer option and try again Go to Printing Preferences click Paper tab and set type to thin paper see Opening printing preferences on page 68 Character Voids Character voids are white areas within parts of characters that should be solid black e You may be printing on the wrong surface of the paper Remove the paper and turn it around The paper may not meet paper specifications see Print media specifications on page 267 An unknown image repetitively appearson a few sheets or loose toner light print or contamination occurs Your machine is probably being used at an altitude of 1 000 m 3 281 ft or above The high altitude may affect the print quality such as loose toner or light imaging Change the correct altitude setting to your machine 9 Troubleshooting 2m Solving other problems Copying problems Condition Copies are too light or too dark Suggested solution Tap Copy from the home screen or Apps You can adjust the darkness level of a copy if needed for easier reading if the original contains faint markings or dark images see Changing Darkness on page 101 Condition Frequent copy paper jams occur Suggested solution Fan the stack of paper then turn it over in the tray Replace the paper in the tray with a fresh supply Check adjust the pape
319. uter and powered on 2 From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs 5 Samsung Printers 5 Uninstall Samsung Printer Software From the Windows 8 Start Screen For Windows 8 tak 1 Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and 1 From Charms select Search gt Apps powered on Search and click Control Panel 2 Click on the Uninstall Samsung Printer Software tile in the Start Click Programs and Features screen 2 3 4 Right click the driver you want to uninstall and select Uninstall 5 Follow the instructions in the window w Follow the instructions in the window If you cannot find a Samsung Printer Software tile uninstall from the 3 Follow the instructions in the installation window 2 desktop screen mode e Ifyou want to uninstall Samsung s printer management tools from the Start screen right click the app gt Uninstall gt right click the program you want to delete gt Uninstall and follow the instruction in the window 1 Introduction a J Reinstalling the driver If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it If the printer driver does not work properly uninstall the driver and reinstall it U BF W N Open the Applications folder gt Samsung gt Printer Software Uninstaller To uninstall printer software click Continue Check the program you want to delete and click Uninstall Enter the password and click O
320. utility supplied by O S 1 Launch Printing utility Go to System gt Administration gt Printing menu or execute system config printer command in Terminal program 2 Select your printer and double click it 3 Change default printing options or connection type 4 Click Apply button 3 Printing 95 UNIX printing Proceeding the print job Some features may not be available depending on models or options It means that the features are not supported After installing the printer choose any of the image text or PS files to print ga PWN Execute printui lt file_name_to_print gt command For example if you are printing document1 printui document This will open the UNIX Printer Driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options Select a printer that has been already added Select the printing options from the window such as Page Selection Select how many copies are needed in Number of Copies To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer driver press Properties Press OK to start the print job Changing the machine settings The UNIX printer driver Print Job Manager in which the user can select various print options in printer Properties The following hot keys may also be used H for Help O for OK A for Apply and C for Cancel General tab Paper Size Set the paper size as A4 Letter or ot
321. vice representative 9 Troubleshooting 238 Solving other problems Condition Color or Black background AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc AaBbCc Suggested Solutions If the amount of background shading becomes unacceptable Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan Contact a service representative Check the environmental conditions very dry conditions low humidity or a high level of humidity higher than 80 RH can increase the amount of background shading Remove the old toner cartridge and install a new one Toner smear AaBbCc AaBhCc AaBhCc AaBbCc AaBbCc If toner smears on the page Clean the inside of the machine Cleaning the inside or contact a service representative Check the paper type and quality see Print media specifications on page 267 Remove the imaging unit and install a new one Contact a service representative Change the image transfer belt if it has reached its lifespan Contact a service representative Condition Vertical repetitive defects Suggested Solutions If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side of the page at even intervals e The imaging unit may be damaged If a repetitive mark occurs on the page run a cleaning sheet through several AaBbCc times to clean the imaging unit Cleaning the inside If you AaBbCc still have the same problems remove the imaging unit and AaBbC cH install a new one C
322. view Click OK 5 Print in the window A preview window appears uu Bb W N Select the options you want to apply to the document You can see the preview of the applied features 6 Click Print If you want to run Easy Eco Driver every time you print check Start Easy Eco Driver before printing job checkbox in the Basic tab of the printing preference window 8 Management tools Using Samsung Easy Document Creator Samsung Easy Document Creator is an application to help users scan compile and save documents in multiple formats including epub format These documents can be shared via social networking sites or fax Whether you re a student needing to organize research from the library or a stay at home mom sharing scanned pictures from last year s birthday party Samsung Easy Document Creator will provide you with the necessary tools The Samsung Easy Document Creator provides features mentioned below Image Scanning Use for scanning single or multiple pictures Document Scanning Use for scanning documents with text or text and images Text Converting Use for scanning documents that need to be saved in an editable text format Book Scanning Use for scanning books with the flatbed scanner SNS Upload Provides an easy and quick way to upload scanned image or existing images to a variety of social networking sites SNS E Book Conversion Provides the ability to scan multiple documents as one E Book or convert existi
323. w the payfor print papers into the cabinet service on your machine Dual Cassette Feeder If you are experiencing CLX PFP502D Job Separator This Job separator will help SL JSP500S frequent Paper Source problems you can attach an additional tray The optional tray can hold up to 1 040 sheets You can print documents in various sizes and types of print materials in the tray Working Table You can place an external authentication device or miscellaneous items on the working table CLX WKT000 SL WKT101 the machine to collate printouts 10 Consumables and accessories 254 Available maintenance parts You need to replace the maintenance parts at specific intervals to keep the machine in the best condition and avoid print quality and paper feeding problems resulting from the worn out parts Maintenance parts are mostly rollers belts and pads However the replacement period and parts may differ depending on the model Replacing maintenance parts can be performed only by an authorized service provider dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine To purchase maintenance parts contact the retailer where you bought the machine The replacement period for the maintenance parts is informed by the Samsung Printer Status program Or if your machine supports display screen a message is displayed in the display screen The replacement period varies based on the operating system used computing performance application
324. wing on your machine using a USB Drive device Scan documents and save them on a USB Drive device Print data stored on a USB Drive device Format the USB Drive device Your machine supports USB Drive devices with FAT16 FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes Check your USB Drive device s file system from your dealer You must use only an authorized USB Drive device with an A plug type connector Oe Of O xX Uy J Use only a USB Drive device with metal shielded connector Only use a USB Drive device that has obtained compatibility certification otherwise the machine might not recognize it Insert a USB Drive device into the USB port on your machine 10 Consumables and accessories 259 Using a USB Drive device Do not insert the USB Drive device to other ports except the ports which is Printing from a USB Drive device as shown below the image If you insert the USB Drive device to other ports h hine sh i he displ NE MGCHINESAGYS WAMING MESAJE Clie Cisplay seeen You can directly print files stored on a USB Drive device You can print TIFF JPEG and PRN files USB print option supported file types PRN Only files created by provided driver with your machine are compatible PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when you print a document The document will be saved as a PRN file rather than printed on paper Only PRN files created in this fashion can be printed directly from U
325. wly push and pull the LSU window cleaning stick 4 or 5 2 X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series times to clean the LSU window X422x X425x X430x X40x seriesonly 10 Close the front cover Ensure that the cover is securely closed X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series Insert LSU window cleaning stick back into its place X422x X425x X430x X40x series only KA If the front cover is not completely closed the machine will not operate 4 Maintenance 351 Cleaning the machine Cleaning the chargers of imaging units The paper dust stick and the chargers of the imaging units will need to be cleaned after a specified number of paper is printed out When the message that demands you to clean the chargers of the imaging units appears you have to clean the paper dust stick first Then clean the chargers The time when the message appears depends on environmental factors like altitude temperature humidity and so on You need to clean the charger to maintain printing quality If cleaning is done the message will disappear automatically Follow the cleaning procedure below Click this link to open an animation about cleaning the charger of imaging units Open the front door 1 X422x Series X425x Series X430x Series K425x Series K430x Series K435x Series 3 Remove the waste toner c
326. wn when you click more settings Samsung Printer Experience is not installed Download the app from the Windows Store and install it 9 Troubleshooting ga Solving other problems Condition Machine information is not displayed when you click the device in the Devices and Printers Suggested solutions Check the Printer properties Click the Ports tab Control Panel gt Devices and Printers 5 Right click on your printer icon and select Printer properties If the port is set to File or LPT uncheck them and select TCP IP USB or WSD Refer to the Microsoft Windows User s Guide that came with your computer for further information on Windows error messages Common Mac problems Condition The machine does not print PDF files correctly Some parts of graphics text or illustrations are missing Suggested solutions Printing the PDF file as an image may enable the file to print Turn on Print As Image from the Acrobat printing options It will take longer to print when you print a PDF file as an image Some letters are not displayed normally during cover page printing Mac OS cannot create the font while printing the cover page The English alphabet and numbers are displayed normally on the cover page When printing a document in Mac with Acrobat Reader 6 0 or higher colors print incorrectly Make sure that the resolution setting in your machine driver matches the one in
327. ws Store 1 From Charms select Search 2 Click Store 3 Search and click Samsung Printer Experience 4 Click Install If you install the driver using the supplied software CD V4 driver is not installed If you want to use the V4 driver in the Desktop screen you can download from the Samsung website www samsung com gt find your 3 Double click the CD ROM icon that appears on your Mac desktop product gt Support or downloads For Mac OS X 10 8 double click the CD ROM that appears on Finder Ifyou want to install Samsung s printer management tools you need to i Il th i h li f D natal mena Shing SURDIGA Srian Double click the MAC_Installer folder gt Installer OS X icon 1 Make sure that your computer is connected to the Internet and powered Click Continue on Read the license agreement and click Continue 2 Make sure that the machine is powered on Click Agree to agree to the license agreement 3 Connect the computer and the machine with a USB cable O N QAU A Click Install All components necessary for machine operations will be The driver is automatically installed from the Windows Update installed If you click Customize you can choose individual components to install 1 Introduction EI Installing the driver locally 9 Enter the password and click OK or Install Software 10 Select USB Connected Printer on the Printer Connection Type and click Continue Click Add Printer button to sel
328. y or contain photographs you can Book Center amp Edge Erase You can change the void area setting for the adjust the resolution to produce a higher quality fax binding around the entire book edge or for the center width and side edges Resolution Standard Usually recommended for originals with text This option will reduce the transmission time B Advanced Fax fax user only Fine Recommended for the originals containing small characters thin Set the sending options for fax such as Quick Start Fax and Delay Send lines or text from a dot matrix printer p Off Disables this feature Super Fine Recommended for originals containing fine details This option is only available if the receiving machine also supports Super Fine resolution Quick Start Fax The machine will begin to transmit the fax right after the first page has been scanned Originals with many pages can be sent this way without overflowing the machine s memory Ultra Fine Recommended for originals containing extremely fine details This option is only available if the receiving machine also Delay Send Set your machine to send a fax at scheduled time Define the supports Ultra Fine resolution Job Name and Start Time Book Scan You can delay a fax by any length of time starting 1 minute and 24 hours after the scan Use this feature to scan a book If the book is too thick lift the DADF until its hinges are engaged by the stopper then close the DADF
329. your SMB or FTP server check the Anonymous box This box is unchecked by default If you checked the Anonymous box go to step 18 Click Login Enter your ID and password and select a domain to log in to Click Login 16 Enter a password in Password and re enter the same password in Click Address Book Confirm Password O N DO UH Mb UW Click Add 1 7 Enter a domain name in Domain 7 Setting up an address book 155 Using SyncThru Web Service L 18 19 If the SMB server you entered is not registered to a domain leave this field blank or enter the computer name of the SMB server Enter the scan file folder to store scanned images in Path Example shared_Folder Select Scan folder creating policy options Create new folder using login name If you select this option the machine creates a sub folder in the file folder you selected The sub folder is named using the user name from step 15 If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same name the machine does not create a sub folder Create new folder every You can set the cycle of sub folder creation The machine create a sub folder according to these options If the file folder already has a sub folder of the same name the machine does not create a sub folder Day A sub folder is created every day using the name format YYYY MM DD for example 2012 01 01 Month A sub folder is created every month using

Samsung Xpress SL-K4250RX multifunctional

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents